‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬

‫ﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﮐﺎﺭﺷﻨﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﺭﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﭘﺮﺍﮐﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺍﻧﺸﺠﻮﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺷﻨﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﺭﺷﺪ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻫﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻭ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﮐﻠﻴﺪﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﻡﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺮﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﺍﻫﮕﺸﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﻳﮑﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﭼﺎﺭﭼﻮﺏ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻠﻲ ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪ ﭘﺎﺭﺳﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻫﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺍﻧﺸﺠﻮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ‬
‫ﮐﺴﺐ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﮔﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻓﻘﻴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻟﻒ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﭘﺮ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﻭ ﭘﺮ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﮑﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺼﻮﻝ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺳﻌﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺳﻮﺍﻻﺕ ﮐﻨﮑﻮﺭ ﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﭼﻬﻞ ﭘﺮﺳﺶ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﮑﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﮐﻨﮑﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﺮﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻓﺼﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﻧﺸﺠﻮ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﻫﺮﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻧﺲ ﻣﻮﻓﻘﻴﺖ ﺍﻭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﻟﻒ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﮑﺎﺭﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻨﺎﺏ ﺁﻗﺎﻱ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﮐﺎﻭﻩ ﻋﺎﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺯﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺘﺮﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﭘﺎﺭﺳﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﭘﻴﮕﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺣﻤﺎﺕ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻧﺸﺮ ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﮐﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺸﮑﺮ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﺩﺍﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻨﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ آرزوي ﻣﻮﻓﻘﯿﺖ‬

‫ﻣﺤﻤﻮد ﻣﯿﺮزازاده‬
 ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ‬
‫‪ -۱‬ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﻣﻮﻟﻜﻮﻟﻲ ﻭ ﺟﺎﺑﻪﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﻣﻮﻟﻜﻮﻟﻲ ﺗﻮﺩﻩ ﺳﻴﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺳﻴﺎﻻﺗﻲ( ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﺑﻪﺟﺎﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺩﻩ ﺳﻴﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ) ‪. ( v ¹ 0‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﭘﺘﺎﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ‬
‫ﻛﻔﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۲‬ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﻣﻮﻟﻜﻮﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺎﻻﺕ‬

‫ﺷﺎﺭ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ) ‪ ( N A‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻮﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺰﺀ ‪ A‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﻇﺮ ﻟﺨﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪N A = CA v A‬‬ ‫)‪(١‬‬
‫‪ vA‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺟﺰﺀ ‪ A‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻇﺮ ﻟﺨﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭﺳﻜﻮﭘﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻮﻟﻜﻮﻟﻲ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ‪ vA‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻮﻟﻜﻮﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺖﻫﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻛﻤﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﻮﻳﺴﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ٢‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫‪æ‬‬ ‫‪*ö‬‬ ‫*‬

‫‪N A = CA çç v A - v ÷÷ + CA v‬‬ ‫)‪(٢‬‬
‫‪è‬‬ ‫‪ø‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪N A = J A + CA v‬‬ ‫)‪(٣‬‬
‫‪æ‬‬ ‫‪*ö‬‬
‫÷÷ ‪J A = CA çç vA - v‬‬ ‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫‪è‬‬ ‫‪ø‬‬
‫*‬
‫=‪v‬‬
‫‪å Ci vi = å xi vi‬‬ ‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫‪å Ci‬‬
‫*‬ ‫*‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ : N A ،‬ﺷﺎﺭ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ‪ : J A ، A‬ﺷﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ‪ A‬ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ‪ : CA v ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ : v‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻟﻲ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۱-۲‬ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻓﻴﻚ ﻭ ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ‬

‫ﻓﺮﻡ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﺑﻲ ﻗﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻁ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻓﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪J A = -CDABÑ x A‬‬ ‫)‪(۶‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﻣﻮﻟﻲ ﻛﻞ )‪ (C‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪J A = - DABÑ CA‬‬ ‫)‪(۷‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻓﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ‪ A‬ﺩﺭ ‪ ( DAB ) B‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﻼﻟﻴﺖ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬

‫‪m2‬‬ ‫‪m2‬‬ ‫‪m2‬‬

‫‪ 10-12‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺟﺰﺀ ‪ B‬ﮔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻳﺎ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ‬ ‫‪ 10-9‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪، 10-5‬‬ ‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺟﺎﻣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬ ‫·‬
‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻣﺎ ﻭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫·‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1 1‬‬
‫‪D AB  T 2 ,‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫)‪(۸‬‬
‫‪Pt f‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ‪ T‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﮔﺎﺯ ﻭ ‪ f‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻮﻟﻜﻮﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﻣﺎ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 50°c‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ f‬ﺍﺛﺮﻱ ﺑﺮ ‪ DAB‬ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪D AB, 2‬‬ ‫‪æ T ö2 æ P ö‬‬
‫÷ ‪=ç 2 ÷ ç 1‬‬ ‫)‪(۹‬‬
‫‪D AB,1‬‬ ‫‪è T1 ø è P2 ø‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻣﺎ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺴﻜﻮﺯﻳﺘﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫·‬
‫‪0.5‬‬ ‫‪0.6‬‬
‫‪D AB, 2‬‬ ‫‪æ T öæ m öæ M ö‬‬ ‫‪æ v A1 ö‬‬
‫÷ ‪= ç 2 ÷ ç 1 ÷ ç B2‬‬ ‫‪ç‬‬ ‫÷‬ ‫)‪(۱۰‬‬
‫‪D AB,1‬‬ ‫‪è T1 ø è m 2 ø è M B1 ø‬‬ ‫‪è v A2 ø‬‬
‫‪ : v A‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺟﺰﺀ ‪A‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ‪ : T‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‪ : m ،‬ﻭﻳﺴﻜﻮﺯﻳﺘﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ‪ : M B ،‬ﺟﺮﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﻜﻮﻟﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ‪،‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪٣‬‬

‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ‬ ‫·‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ DAB = DBA‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﻣﻮﻟﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬

‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﻟﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪( å ji = 0) .‬‬ ‫·‬

‫‪ -۲-۲‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻓﻴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ )‪ (۳‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﻮﻳﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪N A = -CDABÑ x A + x A‬‬ ‫‪å Ni‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۱‬‬
‫‪CA‬‬
‫= ‪xA‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪å Ni = N A + N B‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۲‬‬

‫‪NA‬‬ ‫‪ -۳-۲‬ﺍﺛﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺮ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺍﻛﻨﺶ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﻤﻮﮊﻧﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﻪ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺮﺥ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺰﺀ ) ‪ ( G A‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪ G A‬ﺑﺎ ‪ N A‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪G A = N A .A‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۳‬‬
‫‪ A‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺰﻳﻦ‪ A ،‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﻭ ﻛﺮﻭﻱ ‪ A‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ A = 2prL‬ﻭ ‪ A = 4pr 2‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫‪dN A‬‬
‫‪ ,‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ = ‪ : N A‬ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪=0‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۴‬‬
‫‪dZ‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪ ,‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ = ) ‪ : G A = N A ( 2prL‬ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ‬ ‫‪( r NA ) = 0‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۵‬‬
‫‪dr‬‬

‫(‬ ‫)‬
‫‪ ,‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ = ‪ : G A = N A 4pr 2‬ﻛﺮﻩ‬
‫‪d 2‬‬
‫‪dr‬‬
‫(‬
‫‪r NA = 0‬‬‫)‬ ‫)‪(۱۶‬‬

‫‪ -۴-۲‬ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺷﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ‬

‫)ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ )‪ ((۱۱‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺕﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪å Ni‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻡ‬
‫‪ -۱‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫® ‪NA ¹ 0 , NB = 0‬‬ ‫‪å Ni = N A‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۷‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭ ﺩﻓﻊ‪ ،‬ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺧﺸﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺳﻨﺠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺻﺎﺩﻕ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫‪ -۲‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻁ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎ‪:‬‬
‫‪NA = - NB‬‬ ‫®‬ ‫‪å Ni = 0‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۸‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻭﺍﻛﻨﺶ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻭﺍﻛﻨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪å Ni‬‬ ‫‪ -۳‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﺗﻮﺃﻡ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﻛﻨﺶ ﻫﺘﺮﻭﮊﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺮﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪aA + bB +  ® r R + sS + ‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۹‬‬
‫‪NA NB‬‬ ‫‪N‬‬ ‫‪N‬‬
‫=‬ ‫‪= = R = S =‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۰‬‬
‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪-r‬‬ ‫‪-s‬‬
‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪æ‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪ö‬‬
‫‪å Ni = NA + a NA +  - a NA - a NA -  = çè1 + a +  - a - a -  ÷øNA‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۱‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ )‪ (۲۰‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻭﺍﻛﻨﺶ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺕﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪å Ni ¹ 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ‬

‫‪é NA‬‬ ‫‪C ù‬‬
‫‪ê‬‬ ‫‪- A2 ú‬‬
‫= ‪NA‬‬
‫‪NA‬‬ ‫‪CD AB‬‬
‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪Ln êê‬‬
‫‪å‬‬ ‫‪N‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬
‫‪ú‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۲‬‬
‫‪å‬‬ ‫‪Ni‬‬ ‫‪Z‬‬
‫‪ê‬‬
‫‪NA‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪CA1 ú‬‬
‫‪ú‬‬
‫‪ëê‬‬‫‪å‬‬ ‫‪Ni‬‬ ‫‪C ú‬‬
‫‪û‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪å Ni = 0‬‬
‫‪CD AB é CA1 CA2 ù CD AB‬‬
‫= ‪NA‬‬
‫‪Z êë C‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫‪C úû‬‬
‫=‬
‫‪Z‬‬
‫] ‪[ x A1 - x A2‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۳‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕﻫﺎ )ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﻭ ﻛﺮﻩ( ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺷﺎﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻧﺮﺥ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ )‪ (۱۸) ، (۱۷) ، (۱۶) ، (۱۵) ،(۱۱‬ﻭ )‪ (۲۱‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻧﺮﺥ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ‪ R1‬ﻭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪ R 2‬ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ‪ L‬ﻛﻪ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ‪ CA1‬ﻭ ‪ CA2‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪dCA CA‬‬
‫‪å Ni = N A‬‬ ‫‪® N A = -D AB‬‬
‫‪dr‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪NA‬‬

‫‪dCA‬‬
‫‪- D AB‬‬
‫= ‪NA‬‬ ‫‪dr‬‬
‫‪CA‬‬
‫‪1-‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪é‬‬ ‫‪dCA‬‬ ‫‪ù‬‬
‫‪ê - D AB dr‬‬ ‫‪ú‬‬
‫‪GA = ê‬‬ ‫) ‪ú ( 2prL‬‬
‫‪ê 1 - CA‬‬ ‫‪ú‬‬
‫‪êë‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪úû‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪٥‬‬

‫‪CA 2‬‬

‫‪ò‬‬
‫‪dCA‬‬
‫‪-2pLD AB‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪CA1‬‬ ‫‪1- A‬‬
‫= ‪GA‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬
‫‪R2‬‬

‫‪ò‬‬
‫‪dr‬‬
‫‪R1‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬

‫‪é CA2‬‬ ‫‪ù‬‬

‫‪ê1 - C‬‬ ‫‪ú‬‬
‫‪2pLDAB C Ln ê‬‬ ‫‪ú‬‬
‫‪ê 1 - CA1‬‬ ‫‪ú‬‬
‫‪GA‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪ëê‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪ûú‬‬
‫‪æR ö‬‬
‫÷ ‪Ln ç 2‬‬
‫‪è R1 ø‬‬
‫ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺰﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺧﻄﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺰﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺍﻛﺴﭙﻮﻧﻨﺴﻴﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺷﺎﺭ )‪ (۱۱‬ﺗﺮﻡ ‪ x A å Ni‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﺮﻓﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‬ ‫·‬

‫ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺰﻳﻦ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻄﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻟﮕﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﻲ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ‪ ( x BM ) B‬ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﮕﺎﺭﻳﺘﻤﻲ ﺷﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺧﻄﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬
‫‪x B2 - x B1‬‬
‫= ‪x BM‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۴‬‬
‫‪æx ö‬‬
‫÷ ‪Ln ç B2‬‬
‫‪è x B1 ø‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﺍﺯ ‪ x BM ، A‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۵-۲‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺩﻳﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻧﻴﻚ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﻪ ﺟﺰﺀ ‪ A‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺩﻳﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻥﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ‪ A‬ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪¶ CA‬‬
‫‪+ v. Ñ CA = D ABÑ 2 CA + R A‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۵‬‬
‫‪¶t‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ : R A ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻭﺍﻛﻨﺶ ﻫﻤﻮﮊﻥ‪ : v. Ñ CA ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﻮﺩﻩ ﺳﻴﺎﻝ ﻭ ‪: DABÑ 2 CA‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﺍﻛﻨﺶ ﻫﻤﮕﻦ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﻮﺩﻩﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺎﻝ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪¶ CA‬‬
‫‪= D ABÑ 2 CA‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۶‬‬
‫‪¶t‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻓﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻬﻢﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻓﻴﻚ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﻧﺎﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ‪(Drying‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻓﻴﻚ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺠﺬﻭﺭ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ٦‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫‪ -۶-۲‬ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺗﺼﻌﻴﺪ ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﻧﻔﺘﺎﻟﻴﻦ‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﻧﻔﺘﺎﻟﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪ R 0‬ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺗﺼﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺼﻌﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﮔﻠﻮﻟﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪dn A‬‬ ‫‪r dR‬‬
‫‪NA = -‬‬ ‫‪=-‬‬
‫‪Adt‬‬ ‫‪M dt‬‬
‫‪D AB dPA PA‬‬
‫‪NA‬‬ ‫‪=-‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪NA‬‬
‫‪R g T dr‬‬ ‫‪Pt‬‬
‫‪D AB dPA‬‬
‫‪R g T dr‬‬
‫‪NA‬‬ ‫‪=-‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪1- A‬‬
‫‪Pt‬‬

‫(‬
‫‪G A = N A . 4pr 2‬‬ ‫)‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪dPA‬‬
‫‪-4pD AB‬‬ ‫‪òP‬‬ ‫‪S‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪1- A‬‬
‫‪Pt‬‬
‫= ‪GA‬‬
‫‪¥‬‬ ‫‪dr‬‬
‫‪RgT‬‬ ‫‪òR‬‬ ‫‪r2‬‬
‫‪4pD AB Pt R‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫= ‪GA‬‬ ‫‪Ln‬‬
‫‪RgT‬‬ ‫‪PAS‬‬
‫‪1-‬‬
‫‪Pt‬‬
‫‪rR g T‬‬
‫=‪t‬‬ ‫‪R 02‬‬
‫‪æ P‬‬ ‫‪ö‬‬
‫‪2MD AB Pt Ln ç‬‬ ‫‪t‬‬ ‫÷‬
‫÷ ‪ç P - PS‬‬
‫‪è t‬‬ ‫‪A ø‬‬

‫‪ -۳‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺟﺎﺑﻪﺟﺎﻳﻲ‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻮﺩﻩ ﺳﻴﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺳﻴﺎﻻﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺟﺎﺑﻪﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡ ﻏﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ‬
‫‪CDAB‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻄﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ‪ ۲۲‬ﻭ ‪ .(۲۳‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺗﺮﻡ‬
‫‪Z‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ‪ F‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫‪é NA‬‬ ‫‪C ù‬‬
‫‪ê‬‬ ‫‪- A2 ú‬‬
‫‪NA‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪NA‬‬
‫‪F Ln êê‬‬
‫‪Ni‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬‫‪å‬‬ ‫‪ú‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫‪å Ni ¹ 0‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۷‬‬
‫‪å‬‬‫‪Ni‬‬
‫‪ê‬‬
‫‪N‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬
‫‪A - A1‬‬
‫‪ú‬‬
‫‪ú‬‬
‫‪êë‬‬ ‫‪Ni‬‬ ‫‪å‬‬
‫‪C ú‬‬
‫‪û‬‬
‫‪æ CA C ö‬‬
‫÷ ‪N A = F ç 1 - A2‬‬
‫‪ç C‬‬
‫‪è‬‬ ‫‪C ÷ø‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫‪å Ni = 0‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۸‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪٧‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺟﺎﺑﻪﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺟﺎﺑﻪﺟﺎﻳﻲ ) ‪ ( q = h . DT‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﻪ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ´ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ = ﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ‬ ‫)‪(۲۹‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ k‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪å Ni ¹ 0‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎ ‪ì N A = k C DCA = k y Dy A = k G DPA‬‬
‫‪í‬‬ ‫)‪(۳۰‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ‪î N A = k L DCA = k x Dx A‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪å Ni = 0‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎ ‪ì N A = k ¢C DCA = k ¢y Dy A = k ¢G DPA‬‬
‫‪í‬‬ ‫)‪(۳۱‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ‪î N A = k ¢L DCA = k ¢x Dx A‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ F‬ﻭ ‪ k ' ، k‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪F = k G .PBM = k y . y BM = k c CBM = k L .CBM = k x .x BM‬‬ ‫)‪(۳۲‬‬
‫‪F = k ¢G .Pt = k 'y = k 'c C = k 'L C = k 'x‬‬ ‫)‪(۳۳‬‬

‫‪ -۱-۳‬ﺭﻭﺵﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺟﺎﺑﻪﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ F‬ﻭ ‪ k‬ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫)‪(similarity‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺎﻻﺕ‬ ‫·‬
‫ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ‬ ‫·‬
‫ﺣﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺑﻘﺎﻱ ﺟﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻣﻨﺘﻢ ﻭ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻲ‬ ‫·‬
‫ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫·‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺳﺮ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﻛﺎﺭﺷﻨﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ F‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺪﺕﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ k‬ﺑﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﺷﺪﺕﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺟﺎﺑﻪﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻﹰ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻲﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺎﺑﻪﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ‪:‬‬

‫) ‪sh = f ( Re ,Sc‬‬ ‫)‪(۳۴‬‬

‫ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺎﺑﻪﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ‪:‬‬

‫) ‪sh = f ( Gr ,Sc‬‬ ‫)‪(۳۵‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ٨‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ Sc ، Sh‬ﻭ ‪ Re‬ﻭ ‪ Gr‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪FL‬‬ ‫‪F‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺟﺎﺑﻪﺟﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫= ‪sh‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ‬
‫‪CDAB‬‬ ‫‪CD‬‬ ‫‪AB‬‬ ‫)‪(۳۶‬‬
‫‪L‬‬

‫‪ruL‬‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﺮﺳﻲ‬

‫= ‪Re‬‬ ‫=‬
‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺴﻜﻮﺯ‬
‫)‪(۳۷‬‬
‫‪m‬‬

‫‪æ Dr ö 3‬‬
‫‪gç‬‬ ‫‪÷L‬‬
‫‪è‬‬ ‫‪r ø‬‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭﻱ‬
‫= ‪Gr‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻭﻳﺴﻜﻮﺯ‬
‫)‪(۳۸‬‬
‫‪n2‬‬

‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﻣﻮﻣﻨﺘﻢ‬

‫)‪(۳۹‬‬
‫= ‪Sc‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫ﺷﺪﺕ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﺟﺮﻣﻲ‬
‫‪D AB rD AB‬‬
‫ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎ ‪Sc = 0.5  2‬‬ ‫)‪(۴۰‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ‪Sc = 100  50000‬‬ ‫)‪(۴۱‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﺷﻤﻴﺖ )‪ (Sc‬ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﺷﻤﻴﺖ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﻫﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﺷﻤﻴﺖ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 50000‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺴﻜﻮﺯ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪æ‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪Sc ö‬‬ ‫‪æ‬‬ ‫‪n mcp ö‬‬

‫= ‪ ç Le‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫÷‬ ‫= ‪ çç Pr‬ﻭ ﻟﻮﺋﻴﺲ‬ ‫=‬ ‫÷‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﺷﻤﻴﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﺮﺍﻧﺘﻞ‬
‫‪è‬‬ ‫‪D AB Pr ø‬‬ ‫‪è‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪k ÷ø‬‬

‫‪ -۲-۳‬ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺎﻻﺕ‬

‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺑﻘﺎﻱ ﺟﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻣﻨﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪¶ CA‬‬
‫‪+ v. ÑCA = D ABÑ 2 CA + R A‬‬ ‫)‪(۴۲‬‬
‫‪¶t‬‬
‫‪¶T‬‬ ‫‪q‬‬ ‫‪F‬‬
‫‪+ v. ÑT = aÑ 2 T +‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫)‪(۴۳‬‬
‫‪¶t‬‬ ‫‪r Cp r Cp‬‬
‫‪¶v‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪+ v. Ñ v = nÑ 2 v + g - ÑP‬‬ ‫)‪(۴۴‬‬
‫‪¶t‬‬ ‫‪r‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺷﺒﺎﻫﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻄﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫)‪( Pr = Sc = Le = 1‬‬ ‫‪n = a = D AB‬‬ ‫‪-۱‬‬
‫‪ -۲‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪E D = E H = En‬‬ ‫)‪(۴۵‬‬
‫‪¶ CA‬‬
‫) ‪J A = - ( DAB + E D‬‬ ‫)‪(۴۶‬‬
‫‪¶Z‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪٩‬‬

‫) ‪¶ ( r CP T‬‬
‫) ‪q = - ( a + EH‬‬ ‫)‪(۴۷‬‬
‫‪¶Z‬‬
‫)‪¶ (r v‬‬
‫(‬
‫‪t = - n + Eg‬‬ ‫)‬ ‫‪¶Z‬‬
‫)‪(۴۸‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺴﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪) DAB‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﻣﻮﻟﻜﻮﻟﻲ( ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﺹ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ‪ E D‬ﻭ ‪ E H‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮﻧﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ‪ E n‬ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ( ‪E D = E H ¹ E g‬‬ ‫)‪(٤٩‬‬
‫ﻟﺬﺍ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ )‪ (۴۵‬ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ )‪ (۴۹‬ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺎﻻﺕ ﺗﻮﺃﻡ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۳‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻣﺮﺯﻱ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﻫﻢﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ )ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ(‬
‫‪ -۴‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ Re‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۵‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻪ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۶‬ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺴﻜﻮﺯ ) ‪ ، ( F‬ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ) ‪ ، ( q‬ﻭﺍﻛﻨﺶ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ ) ‪ ، ( R A‬ﮔﺮﺍﺩﻳﺎﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ) ‪ ( Ñ P‬ﻭ ﺷﺘﺎﺏ ﺟﺎﺫﺑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺳﺘﺎﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ )‪ (g‬ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۷‬ﺷﺪﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻛﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪æ CA - CAw ö‬‬ ‫‪æ T - Tw ö‬‬ ‫‪æ u ö‬‬
‫‪ ç‬ﺑﺮ‬ ‫÷‬ ‫‪ ç‬ﻭ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ‬ ‫÷‬ ‫‪ ç‬ﻭ ﺩﻣﺎ‬ ‫÷‬ ‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ‪ 7‬ﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬
‫‪è CA¥ - CAw ø‬‬ ‫‪è T¥ - Tw ø‬‬ ‫‪è u¥ ø‬‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻱ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻧﻄﺒﺎﻕ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎ ﻭ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺍﺻﻄﻜﺎﻙ ) ‪ ، ( Cf‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ )‪ (h‬ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ )‪ k‬ﻳﺎ ‪ (f‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺗﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪ 4‬ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﻫﻔﺖﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺣﺘﻤﺎﹰ ﺻﺎﺩﻕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪pr‬‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ‪ h‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ‪ Nu‬ﺍﺯ ‪ sh‬ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﺷﻤﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼﹰ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ‪ Nu‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪Nu = 0.332 Re0.5 Pr 3‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ‪ sh‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪sh = 0.332 Re0.5 Sc 3‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺎﻻﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮﮊﻱ ﺭﻳﻨﻮﻟﺪﺯ ﻛﻠﺒﺮﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Cf‬‬
‫= ‪J D = St D .Sc 3‬‬ ‫)‪(۵۰‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Cf‬‬
‫‪J H = St H‬‬ ‫‪.Pr 3‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫)‪(۵۱‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Cf‬‬
‫= ‪JD = JH‬‬ ‫)‪(۵۲‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ١٠‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ St D‬ﻭ ‪ St H‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺘﻮﻥ ﺟﺮﻣﻲ ﻭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪Sh‬‬ ‫‪F‬‬ ‫‪Nu‬‬ ‫‪h‬‬
‫= ‪St D‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫= ‪,St H‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫)‪(۵۳‬‬
‫‪Re.Sc Cu‬‬ ‫‪Re.Pr r uCp‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮﮊﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬

‫‪ Cf -۱‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮﮊﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺻﻄﻜﺎﻙ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺻﻄﻜﺎﻙ ﺷﻜﻠﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ )ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ(‬
‫‪Cf‬‬
‫‪JD = JH ¹‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮﮊﻱ ﺻﺎﺩﻕ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ -۲‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮﮊﻱ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ‪ Cf ، k ، h‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺍﺻﻄﻜﺎﻙ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻫﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۳‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮﮊﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺁﺭﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺻﺎﺩﻕ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۴‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﻧﺎﻟﻮﮊﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﺷﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺻﺎﺩﻕ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۳-۳‬ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ‬

‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺫﻳﻞ ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱﻫﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫)‪(film‬‬ ‫‪ -۱‬ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ـ ﺳﻴﺎﻝ ﺑﻪﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪) .‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺁﺭﺍﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬ ‫·‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬
‫ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻻﻳﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬
‫ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺧﻄﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫·‬
‫‪DAB C‬‬
‫=‪F‬‬ ‫)‪(۵۴‬‬
‫‪ZF‬‬
‫)‪(Penetration‬‬ ‫‪ -۲‬ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﺭﺳﻮﺥ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺁﺷﻔﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬
‫ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﺎﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻛﻢ(‬ ‫·‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﮔﺎﺯ ـ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫·‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪١١‬‬

‫‪D AB‬‬
‫‪kL = 2‬‬ ‫)‪(۵۵‬‬
‫‪pq‬‬
‫‪ : q‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۳‬ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﻧﻮﺷﻮﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺳﻄﺢ )‪(Surface Renewall‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺿﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﺭﺳﻮﺥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﺎﻝ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫·‬
‫‪k L = DABS‬‬ ‫)‪(۵۶‬‬
‫‪ S‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﻮﺷﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ‪ q‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۴‬ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﻲ ﺩﺍﺑﻴﻨﺰ )ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻲ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺷﻮﻧﺪﮔﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﺩﻡ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻲ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺷﻮﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬
‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫·‬
‫‪æ SZ2‬‬ ‫‪ö‬‬
‫‪k L = DABS‬‬ ‫‪coth ç‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫÷‬ ‫)‪(۵۷‬‬
‫‪ç D AB‬‬ ‫÷‬
‫‪è‬‬ ‫‪ø‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ‪ k L‬ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ‪ DnAB‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ‪ n‬ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 0.5‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 1‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬

‫‪SZ2b‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ‪ Zb‬ﻛﻢ ‪ S ،‬ﻛﻢ ﻭ ‪ DAB‬ﺑﺰﺭﮒ( ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ‬ ‫·‬
‫‪DAB‬‬

‫‪SZ2b‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﻧﻮﺷﻮﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻪ‬
‫‪DAB‬‬

‫‪ -۴‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎ‬

‫ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺗﺎﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺗﻚﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﺳﺮ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﻪ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۱-۴‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﻥ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ١٢‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫‪ yAG‬ﻭ ‪ x AL‬ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺟﺰﺀ ‪ A‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﺩﻩ ﮔﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ x Ai‬ﻭ ‪ yAi‬ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺟﺰﺀ ‪ A‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻭ ﮔﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫) ‪N A = k y ( y AG - y Ai ) = k x ( x Ai - x AL‬‬ ‫)‪(۵۸‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪y AG - y Ai‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬
‫‪=- x‬‬ ‫)‪(۵۹‬‬
‫‪x AL - x Ai‬‬ ‫‪ky‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫*‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ x A - x AL‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ‬
‫*‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ yaG - yA‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﻛﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﻓﺎﺯ ﮔﺎﺯ ) ‪ ( K y‬ﻭ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ) ‪ ( K x‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫*‪æ‬‬ ‫‪ö‬‬ ‫‪æ‬‬ ‫‪* ö‬‬
‫÷÷ ‪N A = K x çç x A - x AL ÷÷ = K y çç y AG - y A‬‬ ‫)‪(۶۰‬‬
‫‪è‬‬ ‫‪ø‬‬ ‫‪è‬‬ ‫‪ø‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬
‫=‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫)‪(۶۱‬‬
‫‪Ky ky kx‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫=‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫)‪(۶۲‬‬
‫‪K x k x mk y‬‬

‫‪ m‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺷﻴﺐ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪١٣‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ )‪ (۵۸‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ F‬ﻫﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪é NA‬‬ ‫‪ù‬‬
‫‪ê‬‬ ‫‪- y Ai ú‬‬
‫‪NA‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪NA‬‬
‫‪FG Ln êê‬‬
‫‪Ni‬‬ ‫‪å‬‬ ‫‪ú‬‬ ‫)‪(۶۳‬‬
‫‪å‬‬‫‪Ni‬‬
‫‪ê‬‬
‫‪NA‬‬ ‫‪ú‬‬
‫‪- y AG ú‬‬
‫‪êë‬‬ ‫‪Ni‬‬ ‫‪å‬‬ ‫‪úû‬‬
‫‪é NA‬‬ ‫‪ù‬‬
‫‪ê‬‬ ‫‪- x AL ú‬‬
‫‪NA‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪NA‬‬
‫‪FL Ln êê‬‬
‫‪Ni‬‬ ‫‪å‬‬ ‫‪ú‬‬ ‫)‪(۶۴‬‬
‫‪å‬‬‫‪Ni‬‬
‫‪ê‬‬
‫‪N‬‬ ‫‪A -x‬‬
‫‪ú‬‬
‫‪Ai ú‬‬
‫‪êë‬‬ ‫‪Ni‬‬ ‫‪å‬‬ ‫‪úû‬‬
‫ﺻﺎﺩﻕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺧﻄﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫‪å Ni ¹ 0‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫‪FL‬‬
‫‪é NA‬‬ ‫‪ù é NA‬‬ ‫‪ùF‬‬
‫‪ê‬‬ ‫‪- y Ai ú ê‬‬ ‫‪- x AL ú G‬‬
‫‪ê‬‬ ‫‪å‬‬ ‫‪Ni‬‬ ‫‪ú=ê‬‬ ‫‪Ni‬‬‫‪å‬‬ ‫‪ú‬‬ ‫)‪(۶۵‬‬
‫‪ê NA‬‬ ‫‪ú ê NA‬‬ ‫‪ú‬‬
‫‪ê‬‬ ‫‪- y AG ú ê‬‬ ‫‪- x Ai ú‬‬
‫‪å‬‬
‫‪ëê‬‬
‫‪Ni‬‬
‫‪ûú ëê‬‬
‫‪Ni‬‬‫‪å‬‬ ‫‪ûú‬‬
‫) ‪N A = FG ( y AG - y Ai‬‬ ‫)‪(۶۶‬‬
‫) ‪N A = FL ( x Ai - x AL‬‬ ‫)‪(۶۷‬‬
‫‪y AG - y Ai‬‬
‫‪x AL - x Ai‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫‪=- L‬‬
‫‪FG‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‬
‫‪å‬‬ ‫)ﺍﮔﺮ ‪Ni = 0‬‬ ‫)‪(۶۸‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ F‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ )‪ (۶۱‬ﻭ )‪ (۶۲‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪å Ni = 0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬
‫=‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫)‪(۶۹‬‬
‫‪FoG FG FL‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫=‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫)‪(۷۰‬‬
‫‪FoL FL mFG‬‬

‫‪ -۳-۴‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﻬﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ‬

‫ﺳﻬﻢ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ky‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫= ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﺯ ﮔﺎﺯ‬ ‫= ‪´ 100‬‬ ‫‪´ 100‬‬ ‫)‪(۷۱‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪mk y‬‬
‫‪1+‬‬
‫‪Ky‬‬ ‫‪kx‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫= ‪ = x ´ 100‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪´ 100‬‬ ‫)‪(۷۲‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬
‫‪1+ x‬‬
‫‪Kx‬‬ ‫‪mk y‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ١٤‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫‪kx‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﻭ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪) m‬ﺷﻴﺐ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ( ﻭ‬
‫‪ky‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ k x » k y‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ m‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ m‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ m‬ﻛﻢ‬ ‫·‬

‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﮔﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ )‪ (۷۲‬ﻭ )‪ (۷۱‬ﺑﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫·‬
‫‪mk y‬‬
‫= ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺎﺯ‬ ‫)‪(۷۳‬‬
‫‪kx‬‬
‫‪kx‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﻫﻢ ‪ m‬ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ‬ ‫·‬
‫‪ky‬‬

‫ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻛﻤﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻛﻴﻔﻲ ﺍﺭﺟﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪ K x = mK y‬ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺻﺎﺩﻕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ‪ k x = mk y‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺻﺎﺩﻕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬

‫)‪(co – current‬‬ ‫‪ -۴-۴‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﺴﻮ‬

‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺰﺀ ‪ A‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ‪) E‬ﻓﺎﺯ ﺳﺒﻚ( ﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ‪) R‬ﻓﺎﺯ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ( ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﻪ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻫﻤﺴﻮﻱ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪Y2 - Y1‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬
‫‪=- s‬‬ ‫)‪(۷۴‬‬
‫‪X 2 - X1‬‬ ‫‪Es‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬
‫=‪X‬‬ ‫=‪,Y‬‬ ‫)‪(۷۵‬‬
‫‪1- x‬‬ ‫‪1- y‬‬
‫‪ R s‬ﻭ ‪ Es‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻔﻮﺫﻱ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ R‬ﻭ ‪ E‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫) ‪R s = R1 (1 - x1 ) = R 2 (1 - x 2‬‬ ‫)‪(۷۶‬‬
‫) ‪Es = E1 (1 - y1 ) = E 2 (1 - y 2‬‬ ‫)‪(۷۷‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪١٥‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ )‪ (Batch‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻫﻤﺴﻮ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ) ‪ ( X1 , Y1‬ﻏﻠﻈﺖﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻭ‬
‫) ‪ ( X 2 , Y2‬ﻏﻠﻈﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻫﻤﺴﻮ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻟﻲ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪(Cross – current‬‬ ‫‪ -۵-۴‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬

‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﺴﻮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ‪ E‬ﺑﻪ ‪ R‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ x s = 0‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻟﻲﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﻼﻝ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪é Y - Y0 Y2 - Y1 ù‬‬
‫‪R s1 + R s2 = - Es ê 1‬‬ ‫‪+‬‬ ‫‪ú‬‬ ‫)‪(۷۸‬‬
‫‪ë X1 - Xs X 2 - Xs û‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ١٦‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺧﻄﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ‪ ، ( Y = mX‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺣﻼﻝ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺘﻖ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫‪ Y1‬ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻄﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺣﻼﻝ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪Y1 = Y0 Y2‬‬ ‫)‪(۷۹‬‬
‫‪é‬‬ ‫‪ù‬‬
‫‪ê Y Y -Y ú‬‬
‫‪0 2‬‬ ‫‪0ú‬‬
‫‪R s1 = R s2‬‬ ‫‪= Es ê‬‬ ‫)‪(۸۰‬‬
‫‪ê‬‬ ‫‪Y0 Y2 ú‬‬
‫‪ê‬‬ ‫‪ú‬‬
‫‪ë‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫‪û‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ‪ R‬ﺑﻪ ‪) E‬ﺩﻓﻊ( ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫)‪(counter current‬‬ ‫‪ -۶-۴‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﺴﻮ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﺴﻮ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪:‬‬

‫‪Y2 - Y1 R s‬‬
‫=‬ ‫)‪(۸۱‬‬
‫‪X 2 - X1 Es‬‬
‫‪E‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﺴﻮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ‪ E‬ﺑﻪ ‪) R‬ﺟﺬﺏ( ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ‪ R‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫)ﺩﻓﻊ( ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪١٧‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺧﻂﭼﻴﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻥﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ‪ a‬ﻭ ‪ b‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪) xy‬ﻛﻮﭼﻚ( ﺭﺳﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲﺁﻣﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﺴﻮ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺗﺎﺳﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺰﻳﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺣﻼﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﺴﻮ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺟﺬﺏ )ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ‪ E‬ﺑﻪ ‪ (R‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺗﻼﻗﻲ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍ ﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺝ ) ‪ ( X1‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺎﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪æ Y -Y‬‬ ‫‪ö‬‬
‫‪R smin = -Es ç 2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫÷‬ ‫)‪(۸۲‬‬
‫‪ç X 2 - X1eq‬‬ ‫÷‬
‫‪è‬‬ ‫‪ø‬‬
‫‪æ‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ‪ X1eq‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺎ ‪ Y1‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ÷‪ ö‬ﻣﺜﻼﹰ‬
‫‪Y1‬‬
‫= ‪ ç X1eq‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ‪ R‬ﺑﻪ ‪ E‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺣﻼﻝ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪è‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫‪ø‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺑﺮﺝ ) ‪ ( Y2‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪-R s‬‬
‫= ‪Es min‬‬ ‫)‪(۸۳‬‬
‫‪é Y2eq - Y1 ù‬‬
‫‪ê‬‬ ‫‪ú‬‬
‫‪ë X 2 - X1 û‬‬
‫‪( y2eq = mX2‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ‪ Y2eq‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺎ ‪ X 2‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ) ﻣﺜﻼﹰ‬

‫‪ -۷-۴‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻋﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﺴﻮ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﺴﻮ ﻭ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺫﻳﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﺒﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻭ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺧﻄﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻛﺮﻣﺴﺮ ﻋﺪﻩ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪N P = f éë YN P +1 , Y1 , X 0 , m , A ùû‬‬ ‫)‪(۸۴‬‬

‫‪N P = f éë YN P +1 , X 0 , X N P , m ,Sùû‬‬ ‫)‪(۸۵‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ١٨‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ‪ ۸۴‬ﻭ ‪ ۸۵‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻛﺮﻣﺴﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ‪ E‬ﺑﻪ ‪) R‬ﺟﺬﺏ( ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ‪ R‬ﺑﻪ ‪) E‬ﺩﻓﻊ( ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ X0 .‬ﻭ ‪ X N P‬ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ‪ A‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺝ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ ‪ YN P +1‬ﻭ ‪ Y1‬ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ‪ A‬ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Rs‬‬
‫= ‪ A = Es‬ﻓﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﺟﺬﺏ‬ ‫ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫)‪(۸۶‬‬
‫‪m‬‬ ‫ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ‬

‫ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ‬
‫= ‪ S = m‬ﻓﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﻓﻊ‬ ‫)‪(۸۷‬‬
‫‪Rs‬‬ ‫ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫‪Es‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﺟﺬﺏ )‪) (A‬ﺩﻭﺭ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ( ﻋﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻓﻊ )‪ (S‬ﻋﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )‪ ، ( A = 1‬ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻲﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻛﺮﻣﺴﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻋﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺰﺀ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۵‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﺯ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ‬

‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﺯ ـ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﮔﺎﺯ ﭘﺮﺍﻛﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ‬
‫ﭘﺮﺍﻛﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﮔﺎﺯ ﭘﺮﺍﻛﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬ﮒ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﺩﺍﺭ )‪(Tray Tower‬‬ ‫‪-۱‬‬
‫‪ -۲‬ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ‬
‫‪ -۳‬ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﻫﻤﺰﻥﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﭘﺮﺍﻛﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -۱‬ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫)‪(Wetted Wall Tower‬‬ ‫‪ -۲‬ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﺷﺸﻲ )‪(Spray Tower‬‬ ‫‪-۳‬‬
‫‪ -۴‬ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪١٩‬‬

‫‪ -۱-۵‬ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﮔﺎﺯ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ )‪ (spurger‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻬﻢﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﻛﻨﺶ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬
‫ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﻮﺍﺩﻫﻲ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﺘﻮﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﺮﻳﻨﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﻤﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻏﺬ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺑﻨﺎﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻏﺎﺏ ﺁﻫﻚ ﻭ ﻫﻴﺪﺭﻭﮊﻧﺎﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺭﻭﻏﻦ ﻧﺒﺎﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ )ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺍﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ( ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪6F G‬‬
‫=‪a‬‬ ‫)‪(۸۸‬‬
‫‪dP‬‬
‫‪æ m2 ö‬‬
‫‪ : a çç‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ‪ : F G ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ )ﻳﺎ ﻛﺴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺍﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ( ﻭ ‪ : d P‬ﻗﻄﺮ‬ ‫÷‬
‫÷ ‪3‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ‬
‫‪èm ø‬‬
‫ﺣﺒﺎﺏﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﭼﻮﻥ ﮔﺎﺯ ﭘﺮﺍﻛﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۲-۵‬ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﻫﻤﺰﻥﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﻫﻤﺰﻥ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻁ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺰﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻫﻤﺰﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻲ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺰﻥ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻁ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﻤﺰﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﻲﺑﻌﺪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫) ‪Po = f ( Re , We , Fr‬‬ ‫)‪(۸۹‬‬
‫‪æ‬‬ ‫‪dN 2‬‬ ‫‪ö‬‬ ‫‪æ‬‬ ‫‪r Nd 2‬‬ ‫‪ö‬‬ ‫‪æ‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫‪ö‬‬
‫= ‪ : We ، çç Fr‬ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫÷‬ ‫= ‪ : Fr ، çç Re‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺮﻭﺩ‬ ‫÷‬ ‫= ‪ : Re ، çç Po‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺭﻳﻨﻮﻟﺪﺯ‬ ‫÷‬ ‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ‪ : Po‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪è‬‬ ‫‪g‬‬ ‫÷‬
‫‪ø‬‬ ‫‪è‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫÷‬
‫‪ø‬‬ ‫‪è‬‬ ‫‪r N3d5 ÷ø‬‬
‫‪æ‬‬ ‫‪r N 2 d 2 .d P‬‬ ‫‪ö‬‬
‫= ‪ ç We‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ‪ N ، P‬ﻭ ‪ d‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﻤﺰﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺭ ﻫﻤﺰﻥ ﻭ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻫﻤﺰﻥ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫÷‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺮ‬
‫‪ç‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫÷‬
‫‪è‬‬ ‫‪ø‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﻤﺰﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻓﺮﻭﺩ ) ‪ ( Fr‬ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ‪ vortex‬ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺎﺯﻥ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻓﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﺸﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﻤﺰﻥ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ We‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﻤﺰﻥ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻁ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻁ ﮔﺎﺯ ـ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ(‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ٢٠‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫‪æ‬‬ ‫‪1 ö‬‬

‫‪ ç Po ‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻢ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﺯ ‪ Re‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺁﺭﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺭﻳﻨﻮﻟﺪﺯ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪è‬‬ ‫‪Re ÷ø‬‬

‫ﺗﺰﺭﻳﻖ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻁ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۳-۵‬ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﭘﺮﺍﻛﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎ ‪) Weir‬ﺑﻨﺪ( ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻃﻲ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ‪ Down Comer‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻣﺠﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻳﺰﺵ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﺻﺮﻓﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻭ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎﹰ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻟﻲ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﻴﺐﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯﺩﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻳﻜﻨﻮﺍﺧﺖ ﺣﺒﺎﺏﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﺩﺍﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 5-15%‬ﺣﺠﻤﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 2‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 3‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ ﭼﺴﺒﻴﺪﻥ ﺣﺒﺎﺏﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺫﻳﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -۱‬ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﮔﻲ )‪(Entrainment‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﮔﺎﺯ ـ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻣﻲﺍﻓﺘﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺝ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۲‬ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺴﺪﺍﺩ )‪(priming‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺣﺎﺩ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻛﻒﺯﺍ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﻪ ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﻛﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(coning‬‬ ‫‪ -۳‬ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﺨﺮﻭﻃﻲ ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﭘﺮﺍﻛﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺠﺮﺍ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(Flooding‬‬ ‫‪ -۴‬ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻃﻐﻴﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻃﻐﻴﺎﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﻳﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ‪ Down Comer‬ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺣﺎﺩ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ‪ Down Comer‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۵‬ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﭼﻜﻪ )‪(Weeping‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻛﻢ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﭼﻜﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪٢١‬‬

‫‪ -۶‬ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺭﺵ )‪(Dumping‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻢ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺭﺵ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻣﻲﺍﻓﺘﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﺩﺍﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 0.1Psi‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ‪ Turn down Ratio‬ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻨﺠﺎﻧﻲ )‪ (Bubble Cap‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ) ‪ (10  12‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﭽﻪﺍﻱ )‪ (Valve Tray‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ) ‪ ( 5  6‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺸﺒﻚ )‪ (Sieve Tray‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ )‪ ( 2  3‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑﭘﺬﻳﺮﻱ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪﻱ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪é k y ah L ù‬‬
‫‪E oG = 1 - exp ê -‬‬ ‫‪ú‬‬ ‫)‪(۹۰‬‬
‫‪êë‬‬ ‫‪G ¢ úû‬‬

‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ‪ : a‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺣﺒﺎﺏﻫﺎ‪ : h L ،‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﻭ ‪ : G ¢‬ﺷﺪﺕ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﮔﺎﺯ )ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﺑﻲ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺑﺮﺝ( ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺣﺒﺎﺏﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻫﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﻓﺮﻱ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ 100%‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﻓﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻟﻲ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺳﺎﺩﻩﺗﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻋﺪﻩ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺪﻩ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۴-۵‬ﺷﺴﺘﺸﻮﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﭘﺮﺍﻛﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﻛﻨﺶ‬
‫ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻛﻢ ﮔﺎﺯ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪) .‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ‪ SO2‬ﺍﺯ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﻏﺎﺏ ﺁﻫﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻛﻢ ﮔﺎﺯ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‬

‫‪ -۵-۵‬ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﺮﺝ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻧﺮﺥ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺭ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪G A = N A . pDH‬‬ ‫)‪(۹۱‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ‪ D‬ﻭ ‪ H‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻗﻄﺮ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺝ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ( ﻭ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﮔﺎﺯ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻛﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺧﻨﻚﺳﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻘﻴﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﺯ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺁﺳﺎﻥﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻣﻬﻢﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺬﺏ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﺯﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﺃﻡ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﻛﻨﺶ‬
‫ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺍﺳﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﺮﻳﺪﺭﻳﻚ( ﻭ ﻣﻬﻢﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻳﻜﻨﻮﺍﺧﺖ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ٢٢‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫‪ -۶-۵‬ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﺷﺸﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ ﻣﻬﻢﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺧﺸﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻏﺬﺍﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﻭﻳﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﻛﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﺰﻳﺖ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۷-۵‬ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﭘﺮﻛﻦﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺎﻣﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺑﺮﺝ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻭ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺳﻄﺢ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻦﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻧﺎﺯﻛﻲ ﺷﻜﻞ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﭘﺮﻛﻦﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫) ‪6 (1 - e‬‬
‫=‪a‬‬ ‫)‪(۹۲‬‬
‫‪dP‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ‪ : e‬ﺗﺨﻠﺨﻞ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ ﻭ ‪ : d P‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﭘﺮﻛﻦﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺮﻛﻦﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺷﻜﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺣﻠﻘﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﺷﻴﮓ‪ ،‬ﻟﺴﻴﻨﮓ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺒﻲ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﻠﻘﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﺷﻴﮓ ﺳﺎﺩﻩﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﭘﺮﻛﻦﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻛﻢﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﭘﺮﻛﻦﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻭ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺟﻨﺲ ﭘﺮﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺎﺯ ﭘﺮﺍﻛﻨﺪﻩ )ﻣﺎﻳﻊ( ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﭘﺮ ﻛﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻓﺎﺯ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﭘﺮﻛﻦﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺝ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﭼﻴﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﭘﺮﻛﻦﻫﺎ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﭘﺮﻛﻦ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻴﺰ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﭘﺮﻛﻦﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 7‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻴﺶﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻴﺰﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﺮ ﺑﺮﺝ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻗﻄﺮ ﭘﺮﻛﻦﻫﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻩﻫﺎ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﻄﺮ ﭘﺮﻛﻦﻫﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﺮ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎ‬
‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ﹰ‬
‫ﻻ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪pa‬‬ ‫‪pa‬‬
‫‪ 400  600‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﻤﺴﻔﺮﻳﻚ‬ ‫‪ 200  400‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺴﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫‪m‬‬ ‫‪m‬‬
‫‪pa‬‬
‫‪ 8  40‬ﻣﻲﺭﺳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺧﻼﺀ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺧﻼﺀ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪٢٣‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﻱ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ )‪ (Liquid Hold Up‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﻱ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ )‪ (Static Liquid Hold Up‬ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﻱ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ )‪ (Dynamic Liquid Hold Up‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪F Lt = F Ls + F Lo‬‬ ‫)‪(۹۳‬‬
‫‪ F Ls ، F Lt‬ﻭ ‪ F Lo‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﻱ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻛﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﻭ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻚ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻭ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻭ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ( ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﻱ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻴﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﭘﺮﻛﻦﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪ Loading‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻴﻌﺎﻥ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﮔﺎﺯ( ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﻱ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺘﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۸-۵‬ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﺩﺍﺭ‬

‫‪ -۱‬ﺍﻓﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺝ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۲‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﻱ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﺩﺍﺭ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪-۳‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪ -۴‬ﺧﻨﻚﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۵‬ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﺩﺍﺭ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۶‬ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻒﺯﺍ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐﺗﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۷‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺣﻀﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻫﻴﭽﻜﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۸‬ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﺩﺍﺭ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۹‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻮﺳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﺮﻛﻦﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺮﺍﻣﻴﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺍﻓﻴﺘﻲ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﺷﻜﺴﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﺩﺍﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﺝ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺮﻛﻦ ﻓﻠﺰﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۱۰‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺎﻻﺕ ﺧﻮﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺝ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۱۱‬ﻭﺯﻥ ﺑﺮﺝ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۱۲‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺮﻛﻦﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻜﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪۱‬‬
‫‪ -۶‬ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭ ﺩﻓﻊ ﮔﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺬﺏ )‪ (Absorption‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺩﻓﻊ )‪ (Stripping‬ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺟﺬﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺟﺬﺏ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪﻱ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﺯﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪﻱ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﮔﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻨﻚﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺩﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻭ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻢ‪ ،‬ﻛﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﻩ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻫﻤﺪﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻫﻤﺪﻣﺎﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﺴﻮ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺗﻮﺃﻡ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﻛﻨﺶ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺴﻮ ﺍﺭﺟﺢ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﺴﻮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۱-۶‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺩﻳﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴﻴﻠﻲ‬

‫‪Z = H tG . N tG‬‬ ‫)‪(۹۴‬‬
‫‪G¢‬‬
‫= ‪H tG‬‬ ‫)‪(۹۵‬‬
‫‪FG .a‬‬
‫‪y1‬‬ ‫‪(1 - y)iM‬‬
‫= ‪N tG‬‬ ‫‪òy‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫) ‪(1 - y) (y - yi‬‬
‫‪dy‬‬ ‫)‪(۹۶‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪٢٥ ۱‬‬

‫‪y1‬‬ ‫‪dy‬‬ ‫‪1 1 - y2‬‬

‫»‬ ‫‪òy‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪+ Ln‬‬
‫‪y - yi 2‬‬ ‫‪1 - y1‬‬
‫‪y1 - y 2‬‬
‫»‬
‫‪(y - yi )M‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ :H tG‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ )ﻳﺎ ‪ (HETP‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ‪ :N tG‬ﻋﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ‪ : Z‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺩﻳﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻭﻳﮋﺓ ﭘﺮﻛﻦ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪) HETP‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ( ﺁﻥ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﻠﻘﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﺍﺷﻴﮓ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮒﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ HETP‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﻤﺔ ﭘﺮﻛﻦﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ) ‪ ( N tG‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﺟﺬﺏ )ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ( ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺟﺪﺍﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ) ‪ ( y1 - y2‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ‪ y1‬ﻭ ‪ y2‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻛﺴﺮ ﻣﻮﻟﻲ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺗﻮﺃﻡ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﻛﻨﺶ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺴﺮ ﻣﻮﻟﻲ ‪ ya‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺴﺮﻣﻮﻟﻲ ‪ yb‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﮔﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﻭﺍﻛﻨﺶ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ(‪.‬‬

‫) ‪( ya - y b‬‬ ‫‪æy ö‬‬

‫= ‪N tG‬‬ ‫÷ ‪= Ln ç a‬‬ ‫)‪(۹۷‬‬
‫) ‪( ya - 0 ) - ( y b - 0‬‬ ‫‪è yb ø‬‬
‫‪ya - 0‬‬
‫‪Ln‬‬
‫‪yb - 0‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ )‪ (۹۴‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺿﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻳﺎ ﺿﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﻮﻳﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪L¢‬‬
‫‪Z = H tL . N tL‬‬ ‫= ‪, H tL‬‬ ‫)‪(۹۸‬‬
‫‪FL a‬‬
‫‪G¢‬‬
‫‪Z = H toG . N toG‬‬ ‫= ‪, H toG‬‬ ‫)‪(۹۹‬‬
‫‪FoG .a‬‬
‫‪L¢‬‬
‫‪Z = H toL . N toL‬‬ ‫= ‪, H toL‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۰۰‬‬
‫‪FoL .a‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪) HETP‬ﻳﺎ ‪ H tG‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ( ... H tL‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺝ ﭘﺮﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺪﺍﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺩﻳﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫)‪d (Gy‬‬ ‫)‪d (G ¢y‬‬ ‫‪G ¢dy‬‬
‫‪NA = ‬‬ ‫‪=‬‬ ‫‪=‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۰۱‬‬
‫‪AadZ‬‬ ‫‪adZ‬‬ ‫‪(1 - y) adZ‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ‪ : G‬ﺷﺪﻳﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﮔﺎﺯ‪ :G ¢ ،‬ﺷﺪﺕ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﮔﺎﺯ ÷‪ : A ، æç G ¢ = ö‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺮﺝ‪ : a ،‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻭ ‪ : y‬ﻛﺴﺮﻣﻮﻟﻲ ﺟﺰﺀ‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪è‬‬ ‫‪Aø‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ )‪ (-‬ﻳﺎ )‪ (+‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ٢٦‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫‪ -۷‬ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﺟﺪﺍﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﭼﺮﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺟﺪﺍﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺻﺮﻓﺎﹰ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۱-۷‬ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﺪﻩﺁﻝ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺭﺍﺋﻮﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪PA = x A PAsat‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۰۲‬‬
‫‪PB = x B PBsat‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۰۳‬‬
‫‪Pt = PA + PB‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۰۴‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ‪ PA‬ﻭ ‪ PB‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ‪ PAsat‬ﻭ ‪ PBsat‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻕ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪Pt - PBsat‬‬
‫= ‪xA‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۰۵‬‬
‫‪PAsat - PBsat‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﺪﻩﺁﻝ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﺪﻩﺁﻝ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ )ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﻟﺘﻮﻥ( ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪PA x A Psat A‬‬
‫= ‪yA‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫)‪(۱۰۶‬‬
‫‪Pt‬‬ ‫‪Pt‬‬
‫‪PB x B PBsat‬‬
‫= ‪yB‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫)‪(۱۰۷‬‬
‫‪Pt‬‬ ‫‪Pt‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻟﻲ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ – ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ‪ k - value‬ﻫﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪yA‬‬
‫= ‪kA‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۰۸‬‬
‫‪xA‬‬
‫‪yB‬‬
‫= ‪kB‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۰۹‬‬
‫‪xB‬‬
‫‪y A + y B =1‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۱۰‬‬
‫‪1- k B‬‬
‫= ‪xA‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۱۱‬‬
‫‪kA - kB‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﺪﻩﺁﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪x A PAsat / Pt PAsat‬‬
‫= ‪kA‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫)‪(۱۱۲‬‬
‫‪xA‬‬ ‫‪Pt‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ‪ k-value‬ﺗﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻣﺎ )ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ( ﻭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ )ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻋﻜﺲ( ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ‪ k‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺍﺭﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻟﻲ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻓﺮﺍﺭﻳﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ) ‪ ( a AB‬ﻫﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪æ yA‬‬ ‫‪ö‬‬
‫‪ç‬‬ ‫÷‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫‪a AB = è B‬‬ ‫‪ø‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۱۳‬‬
‫‪æ xA‬‬ ‫‪ö‬‬
‫‪ç‬‬ ‫÷‬
‫‪è xB‬‬ ‫‪ø‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪٢٧ ۱‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﺪﻩﺁﻝ‪:‬‬

‫‪PAsat‬‬
‫= ‪a AB‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۱۴‬‬
‫‪PBsat‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ a‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪ax‬‬
‫=‪y‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۱۵‬‬
‫‪1 + (a - 1) x‬‬
‫ﻫﻢﭼﻨﻴﻦ ‪ a‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﺷﻮﺍﺭﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺖ ﺟﺪﺍﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪a < 1.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫‪1.1 < a < 3.5‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﺩﺷﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪3.5 < a < 10‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪10 < a‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ‬

‫‪ -۲-۷‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺷﺒﻨﻢ‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ‪) ZF‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻓﺮﺍﺭ( ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ )‪ (Bubble Point‬ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ‪ ZF‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪å ZiF ki = 1‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۱۶‬‬
‫‪ : ZiF‬ﻛﺴﺮ ﻣﻮﻟﻲ ﺟﺰﺀ ‪ i‬ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻳﺪﻩﺁﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪Pisat‬‬
‫‪å ZiF‬‬ ‫‪Pt‬‬
‫‪=1‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۱۷‬‬

‫‪ZF‬‬ ‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺷﺒﻨﻢ ﺩﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻛﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺮﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻗﻄﺮﻩ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺴﺮ ﻣﻮﻟﻲ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻓﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻗﻄﺮﻩ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ‪ ZF‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷﺒﻨﻢ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪ZiF‬‬
‫‪å‬‬ ‫‪ki‬‬
‫‪=1‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۱۸‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻳﺪﻩﺁﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪:‬‬

‫‪Z‬‬
‫‪å PisatiF‬‬ ‫‪=1‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۱۹‬‬

‫‪Pt‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺷﺒﻨﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﻤﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ٢٨‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺟﻮﺵ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺷﺒﻨﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ )‪ (۱۱۶‬ﻭ )‪ (۱۱۸‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﻠﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪å ZiFki < 1‬‬ ‫·‬

‫ﻣﺨﻠﻮﻁ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪å ZiFki = 1‬‬ ‫·‬

‫‪Z‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﻠﻮﻁ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪å ZiFki > 1 & å kiFi > 1‬‬ ‫·‬

‫‪ZiF‬‬
‫‪å‬‬ ‫‪ki‬‬
‫‪=1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻠﻮﻁ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺷﺒﻨﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫·‬

‫‪ZiF‬‬
‫‪å‬‬ ‫‪ki‬‬
‫‪<1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻠﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻮﭘﺮﻫﻴﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬ ‫·‬

‫‪ -۳-۷‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﺯﺋﻮﺗﺮﻭﭘﻲ‬

‫‪T-xy‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺁﺯﺋﻮﺗﺮﻭﭘﻲ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡﻫﺎﻱ ‪ xy‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺁﺯﺋﻮﺗﺮﻭﭖ ﻣﻲﻧﻴﻤﻢ ﺟﻮﺵ )ﻣﺎﻛﺰﻳﻤﻢ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ( ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺁﺯﺋﻮﺗﺮﻭﭘﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻢﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻏﻠﻈﺘﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺁﺯﺋﻮﺗﺮﻭﭘﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ‪ ( F1‬ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺁﺯﺋﻮﺗﺮﻭﭘﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻏﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ‪ B‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻏﻠﻈﺘﻲ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺁﺯﺋﻮﺗﺮﻭﭘﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ‪ ( F2‬ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺮﻱ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺁﺯﺋﻮﺗﺮﻭﭘﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻏﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ‪ A‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻏﻠﻈﺘﻲ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎﹰ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺁﺯﺋﻮﺗﺮﻭﭘﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺎﻧﻮﻝ ﻭ ﺁﺏ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﺯﺋﻮﺗﺮﻭﭖ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻲﻧﻴﻤﻢ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺁﺗﻤﺴﻔﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ‪) x = y = 0.9‬ﻣﻮﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺁﺯﺋﻮﺗﺮﻭﭖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻛﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻏﻠﻈﺘﻲ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ 90‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﻣﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﻣﺜﻼﹰ ‪ ( ZF = 0.96‬ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺁﺯﺋﻮﺗﺮﻭﭖ ‪ 90‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻭ ‪ 10‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺁﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺑﺮﺝ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻏﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺝ )ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎﹰ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ(‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡﻫﺎﻱ ‪ xy‬ﻭ ‪ T-xy‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺁﺯﺋﻮﺗﺮﻭﭖ ﻣﺎﻛﺰﻳﻤﻢ ﺟﻮﺵ )ﻣﻲﻧﻴﻤﻢ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ( ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪٢٩ ۱‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ‪ F1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻏﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ‪ B‬ﻭ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺁﺯﺋﻮﺗﺮﻭﭘﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ‪ F2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻏﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ‪) A‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺑﺮﺝ( ﻭ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺁﺯﺋﻮﺗﺮﻭﭘﻲ )ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺝ(‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫)‪(Flash‬‬ ‫‪ -۴-۷‬ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﻲ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ‪ Flash‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡﻫﺎﻱ ‪ xy‬ﻭ ‪ T-xy‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﻪ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪ Flash‬ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪æ‬‬ ‫‪Qö‬‬
‫÷ ‪HD - ç HF +‬‬
‫‪W y D - ZF‬‬ ‫‪è‬‬ ‫‪Fø‬‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫)‪(۱۲۰‬‬
‫‪D x w - ZF‬‬ ‫‪æ‬‬ ‫‪Qö‬‬
‫÷ ‪Hw - ç HF +‬‬
‫‪è‬‬ ‫‪Fø‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﻔﺖ‪:‬‬
‫)ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺷﺒﻨﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ( ‪) Tbubble < TFlash < TDew‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ(‬ ‫)‪(۱۲۱‬‬
‫‪po int‬‬ ‫‪Po int‬‬

‫‪ZF‬‬ ‫‪< yD‬‬ ‫‪< yM‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۲۲‬‬

‫‪xN‬‬ ‫‪< xw‬‬ ‫‪< ZF‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۲۳‬‬

‫‪ : yM‬ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺎ ‪ ZF‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ‪ Flash‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺍﺳﺖ ÷‪ : x N . æç = ¥ ö‬ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪èD‬‬ ‫‪ø‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺎ ‪ ZF‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ‪ Flash‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺷﺒﻨﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺍﺳﺖ ÷‪ yM . æç = 0 ö‬ﻭ ‪ x N‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫‪è‬‬‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪ø‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺕﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪a ZF‬‬
‫= ‪ y M‬ﻳﺎ ‪y M = kZF‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۲۴‬‬
‫‪1 + ( a - 1) ZF‬‬
‫‪ZF‬‬ ‫‪ZF‬‬
‫= ‪xN‬‬ ‫= ‪ x N‬ﻳﺎ‬ ‫)‪(۱۲۵‬‬
‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪(1 - a)ZF + a‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﻟﺺﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺭﻗﻴﻖﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺷﺒﻨﻢ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ٣٠‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫‪ -۵-۷‬ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴﻴﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ F‬ﻣﻮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻛﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ‪ ZF‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﺩﻳﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴﻴﻠﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪ W‬ﻣﻮﻝ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻇﺮﻑ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺑﻤﺎﻧﺪ )ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ‪ ( x w‬ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﻪ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺭﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪w‬‬ ‫‪dL‬‬ ‫‪xw‬‬ ‫‪dx‬‬
‫‪òF‬‬ ‫‪L‬‬
‫=‬ ‫‪òZ‬‬ ‫‪F‬‬ ‫‪y-x‬‬
‫)‪(۱۲۶‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ y = kx‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﮕﺮﺍﻝ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺁﻣﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪F‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪Z‬‬
‫‪Ln‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪Ln F‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۲۷‬‬
‫‪w k -1‬‬ ‫‪xw‬‬
‫‪ax‬‬
‫= ‪ y‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫‪1 + ( a - 1) x‬‬

‫‪FZF‬‬ ‫) ‪F (1 - ZF‬‬
‫‪log‬‬ ‫‪= a log‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۲۸‬‬
‫‪Wx w‬‬ ‫) ‪W (1 - x w‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ )‪ (۱۲۸‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻣﻮﻝﻫﺎﻱ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻇﺮﻑ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪a‬‬
‫‪n AF æ n BF ö‬‬
‫‪=ç‬‬ ‫÷‬ ‫)‪(۱۲۹‬‬
‫‪n AW è n BW ø‬‬
‫‪ n AF‬ﻭ ‪ n AW‬ﻋﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﻝﻫﺎﻱ ‪ A‬ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻇﺮﻑ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻓﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻇﺮﻑ ﺟﻤﻊﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ) ‪ ( yD , av‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪F = D+W‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۳۰‬‬
‫‪FZF = Dy D , av + Wx w‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۳۱‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ax w‬‬ ‫‪a ZF‬‬
‫< ‪< y D , av‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۳۲‬‬
‫‪1 + ( a - 1) x w‬‬ ‫‪1 + ( a - 1) ZF‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﻌﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴﻴﻠﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺭﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺁﻣﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪dv‬‬ ‫‪yD‬‬ ‫‪dy‬‬
‫‪òF‬‬ ‫‪v‬‬
‫=‬ ‫‪òZ‬‬ ‫‪F‬‬ ‫‪x-y‬‬
‫)‪(۱۳۳‬‬

‫‪ -۶-۷‬ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﺪﺍﻧﺴﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺭﻳﺒﻮﻳﻠﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪٣١ ۱‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺪﺍﻧﺴﻮﺭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻲ )‪ (Reflux‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﺑﻲ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﺝ ) ‪ ( Lo‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺑﻲ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ‬
‫‪æ‬‬ ‫‪Lo ö‬‬
‫= ‪ ç R‬ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫÷‬ ‫)‪ ، (D‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻲ‬
‫‪è‬‬ ‫‪D ø‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺮﺻﺖ ﺣﻀﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻲ )ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ( ﺟﺬﺏ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﻲ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺑﺮﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﺭﻳﺒﻮﻳﻠﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۱-۶-۷‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻛﻨﺪﺍﻧﺴﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﻨﺪﺍﻧﺴﻮﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﻛﻨﺪﺍﻧﺴﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭ ﻛﻨﺪﺍﻧﺴﻮﺭ ﭘﺎﺭﺷﻴﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺪﺍﻧﺴﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﺪﺍﻧﺴﻮﺭ‬
‫) ‪ ( G1‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻨﺪﺍﻧﺴﻮﺭ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺪﺍﻧﺴﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪TLo = TD = Bubble po int at x D‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۳۴‬‬
‫‪y1 = x o = x D‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۳۵‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻨﺪﺍﻧﺴﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫(‬
‫‪Qc = ( R + 1) D H G1 - H Lo‬‬ ‫)‬ ‫)‪(۱۳۶‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺪﺍﻧﺴﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ‪ H D = H Lo‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻨﺪﺍﻧﺴﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻟﻲ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺪﺍﻧﺴﻮﺭ ﭘﺎﺭﺷﻴﺎﻝ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﺪﺍﻧﺴﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻛﻨﺪﺍﻧﺴﻮﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻴﻌﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫)‪ (Flash‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ‪ G1‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﺭﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺁﻥ ) ‪ ( Lo‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺑﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺁﻥ )‪ (D‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺑﺮﺝ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻨﺪﺍﻧﺴﻮﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪Lo y D - y1‬‬
‫‪-‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫)ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ‪(Flash‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۳۷‬‬
‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪x o - y1‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ٣٢‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫‪TLo = TD = Dew Po int at y D‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۳۸‬‬

‫‪H Lo ¹ H D , H D » H G1‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۳۹‬‬

‫(‬
‫‪Qc = RD H G1 - H Lo‬‬ ‫)‬ ‫)‪(۱۴۰‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﻛﻨﺪﺍﻧﺴﻮﺭ ﭘﺎﺭﺷﻴﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ H - xy‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻨﺪﺍﻧﺴﻮﺭ ﭘﺎﺭﺷﻴﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۲-۶-۷‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺭﻳﺒﻮﻳﻠﺮ‬

‫ﺑﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺭﻳﺒﻮﻳﻠﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻞ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪QB = DH D + Qc + WH w - FH F‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۴۱‬‬
‫ﺭﻳﺒﻮﻳﻠﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺭﻳﺒﻮﻳﻠﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﺳﻴﻔﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﻣﺴﺘﺜﻨﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻟﻲ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۲-۶-۷‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﭘﻮﻧﭽﻮﻥ‪ -‬ﺳﺎﻭﺍﺭﻳﺖ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡﻫﺎﻱ ‪ H - xy‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ì x DD = x D‬‬
‫‪ï‬‬
‫‪DD í‬‬ ‫‪Qc‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۴۲‬‬
‫‪ïîH DD = H D + D‬‬
‫‪ì x Dw = x w‬‬
‫‪ï‬‬
‫‪DW í‬‬ ‫‪QB‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۴۳‬‬
‫‪ïî H Dw = H w - W‬‬

‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ‪ F‬ﻭ ‪ DD‬ﻭ ‪ DW‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ H - xy‬ﺑﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ‪ DD‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ‪ Tie-Line‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﭘﻮﻧﭽﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﻩ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺝ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ )ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺘﺎﺏ ﺗﺮﻳﺒﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ(‪ .‬ﻫﻢﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﭘﻮﻧﭽﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺮﺝ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ‪ Ln‬ﻭ ‪ G n +1‬ﻭ ‪ DD‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ H - xy‬ﺑﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺘﻨﺪ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ‪ DD‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻜﻴﻪﮔﺎﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪:‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪٣٣ ۱‬‬

‫‪Ln‬‬ ‫‪G DD‬‬

‫‪= n +1‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۴۴‬‬
‫‪G n +1‬‬ ‫‪L n DD‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻧﺸﺎﻥﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻃﻮﻝ ﭘﺎﺭﻩﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ G n +1‬ﻭ ‪ DD‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﭘﺎﺭﻩﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ Ln‬ﻭ ‪ DD‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۳-۶-۷‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﻴﻦﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﻲﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ‪) ( R = ¥‬ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻓﻼﻛﺲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﻢ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ( ﻋﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﭘﻮﻧﭽﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺩﺭ ‪ +¥‬ﻭ ‪ -¥‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺝ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ )ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪.( H - xy‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ‪ Fenske‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻳﻚ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻓﺮﺍﺭﻳﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﻩ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪é xD 1 - xw ù‬‬
‫‪ê‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ú‬‬
‫‪ë‬‬ ‫‪1 - xD xw û‬‬
‫‪N min‬‬ ‫‪+ 1 = log‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۴۵‬‬
‫‪log a av‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ‪ aav‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻫﻨﺪﺳﻲ ‪ a‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪aav = a top . a bot‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۴۶‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ‪ N min‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ x w ، x D‬ﻭ ‪ a‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﻩ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۴-۶-۷‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻲ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﭘﻮﻧﭽﻮﻥ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺧﻂ ‪ Tie‬ﺑﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻋﺪﻩ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﺑﻲﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ) ‪ . ( N = ¥‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ) ‪. ( R min‬‬
‫ﻟﺬﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ‪ ، R min‬ﺧﻂ ‪ Tie‬ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻼﻗﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ‪ x D‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ )ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ .( DDmin‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ‬
‫‪ H DDmin‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ‪ H DD‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ R min‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫(‬
‫‪H DDmin = H D + ( R min + 1) H G1 - H Lo‬‬ ‫)‬ ‫)‪(۱۴۷‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺪﺍﻧﺴﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ‪ H D = H Lo‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪H DDmin - H G1‬‬
‫= ‪R min‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۴۸‬‬
‫‪H G1 - H Lo‬‬

‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺝ ) ‪ ( R opt‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ‪ Gilland‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪R opt = (1.2  1.5 ) R min‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۴۹‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ٣٤‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ R min :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻛﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻛﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻮﭘﺮﻫﻴﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ R min‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﻼﻗﻲ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺧﻂ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﺮ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺑﺮﺝ ﻏﻠﻈﺖﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ R min :‬ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ‪ Tie-Line‬ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﺑﻠﻜﻪ ‪ Tie-Line‬ﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ‪ R min‬ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ‬
‫‪ DD‬ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻭ ‪ DW‬ﺁﻥ ﺍ ﺯ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ R min :‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﻓﻼﻛﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺪﻩ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﻲﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۵-۶-۷‬ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﺯﺩﻳﺎﺩ ‪ R‬ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﺝ‬

‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -۱‬ﻋﺪﻩ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺝ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﺮﺝ ﻛﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۲‬ﺩﺑﻲ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ) ‪ ( G1 = ( R + 1) D , Lo = RD‬ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻗﻄﺮ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۳‬ﺑﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻨﺪﺍﻧﺴﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺭﻳﺒﻮﻳﻠﺮ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻨﺪﺍﻧﺴﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺭﻳﺒﻮﻳﻠﺮ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ‪ R‬ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺧﻠﻮﺹ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺑﺮﺝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۶-۶-۷‬ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ‪Cold Reflux‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺪﺍﻧﺴﻮﺭ ‪ Subcool‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ )ﺩﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﺝ( ﺑﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺨﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻛﻨﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪Lo DH Lo Cp DT‬‬
‫= ‪DL‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫)‪(۱۵۰‬‬
‫‪l‬‬ ‫‪l‬‬
‫‪ : DL‬ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﻌﺎﻥ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻭ ‪ : l‬ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻱ ﻧﻬﺎﻥ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﻛﻨﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﺑﻲ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺭﻓﻼﻛﺲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ÷‪ æç R ¢ = ö‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪è‬‬ ‫‪Dø‬‬

‫‪L Lo + DL‬‬ ‫‪é Cp DT ù‬‬

‫= ‪R¢‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= R ê1 +‬‬ ‫‪ú>R‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۵۱‬‬
‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫‪ëê‬‬ ‫‪l ûú‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﻔﺖ ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ‪ Cold Reflux‬ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﺯﺩﻳﺎﺩ ﺭﻓﻼﻛﺲ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ )‪ (۵-۶-۷‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪٣٥ ۱‬‬

‫‪ -۷-۶-۷‬ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻛﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ‪Open Steam‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ‪ F1‬ﻭ ‪ F2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪) DD :‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ‪) DM ، ( F1‬ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ F1‬ﻭ ‪( F2‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪) DW‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ‪ .( F2‬ﻣﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ‪ DD‬ﻭ ‪ DW‬ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ )‪ (۱۴۲‬ﻭ )‪ (۱۴۳‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ‪ DM‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﻪ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺕﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ì‬‬ ‫‪Dx D - F1ZF1‬‬
‫= ‪ïï x DM‬‬ ‫‪D - F1‬‬
‫‪DM í‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۵۲‬‬
‫‪DH D + Qc - F1H F1‬‬
‫= ‪ï H DM‬‬
‫‪ïî‬‬ ‫‪D - F1‬‬
‫‪ì‬‬ ‫‪F2 ZF2 - Wx w‬‬
‫= ‪ïï x DM‬‬ ‫‪F2 - W‬‬
‫‪DM í‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۵۳‬‬
‫‪F2 H F2 + Q B - WH w‬‬
‫= ‪ï H DM‬‬
‫‪ïî‬‬ ‫‪F2 - W‬‬
‫‪ DM‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﻪ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺩﻭ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻛﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ‪ F1‬ﻭ ‪ DD‬ﻭ ‪ DM‬ﺑﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ‪ F2‬ﻭ ‪ DM‬ﻭ ‪ DW‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ )‪ (S‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ‪ DD‬ﻭ ‪ DW‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ S‬ﻭ ‪ F‬ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ì‬‬ ‫‪Dx D + Sx s‬‬
‫‪ïï x DM = D + S‬‬
‫‪DM í‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۵۴‬‬
‫‪DH D + Qc + SHs‬‬
‫= ‪ï H DM‬‬
‫‪îï‬‬ ‫‪D+S‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺁﺏ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻳﺒﻮﻳﻠﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺰﺭﻳﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ì‬‬ ‫‪Wx w‬‬
‫‪ïï x DW = W - S‬‬
‫‪DW í‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۵۵‬‬
‫‪WH w - SHs‬‬
‫= ‪ïH DW‬‬
‫‪ïî‬‬ ‫‪W -S‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ‪ S‬ﺷﺪﺕ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ )‪ (Steam‬ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺝ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ‪ S‬ﻭ ‪ W‬ﻭ ‪ DW‬ﺑﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﻴﻨﻄﻮﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ‪ F‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ DD‬ﻭ ‪ DW‬ﺑﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺎﻣﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۸-۶-۷‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻚ ﻛﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲﻫﺎﻱ ‪ H L - x‬ﻭ ‪ HG - y‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍ ﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﺑﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﻟﻲ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺝ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻲ ‪ .( N A + N B = 0‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ‪ L‬ﻭ ‪ G‬ﺩﺑﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫‪ RD‬ﻭ ‪ ( R + 1) D‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﻪ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬
‫=‪y‬‬ ‫‪x+ D‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۵۶‬‬
‫‪R +1‬‬ ‫‪R +1‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ٣٦‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ) ‪ ( x D , x D‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺧﻂ ‪ 45°‬ﻣﻲﮔﺬﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﺑﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ‪ L‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ G‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﻴﻼﻥ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺨﺶ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪Wx w‬‬
‫=‪y‬‬ ‫‪x-‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۵۷‬‬
‫‪G‬‬ ‫‪G‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ) ‪ ( x w , x w‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺧﻂ ‪ 45°‬ﻣﻲﮔﺬﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺗﻼﻗﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﻪ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪L = L + qF‬‬
‫)‪(۱۵۸‬‬
‫‪G = G + ( q - 1) F‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ‪ q‬ﻛﺴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﺑﻴﻼﻥ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪q‬‬ ‫‪Z‬‬
‫=‪y‬‬ ‫‪x- F‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۵۹‬‬
‫‪q -1‬‬ ‫‪q -1‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ) ‪ ( ZF , ZF‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺧﻂ ‪ 45°‬ﻣﻲﮔﺬﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ q‬ﺩﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪HG - H F‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫=‪q‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫)‪(۱۶۰‬‬
‫‪HG - HL‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻱ ﻧﻬﺎﻥ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ‬

‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬

‫‪HG - H F‬‬ ‫‪q‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ‬ ‫‪HF‬‬ ‫=‪q‬‬ ‫= ﺷﻴﺐ ﺧﻂ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ‬
‫‪HG - H L‬‬ ‫‪q -1‬‬
‫‪q‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺳﺮﺩ‬ ‫‪HF < HL‬‬ ‫‪q >1‬‬ ‫<‪1‬‬ ‫‪<¥‬‬
‫‪q -1‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪HF = HL‬‬ ‫‪q =1‬‬ ‫‪¥‬‬
‫‪q‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﻓﺎﺯﻱ‬ ‫‪HL < HF < HG‬‬ ‫‪0 < q <1‬‬ ‫<‪0‬‬ ‫‪<¥‬‬ ‫ﺷﻴﺐ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ‬
‫‪q -1‬‬

‫ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪H F = HG‬‬ ‫‪q=0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬

‫‪q‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺳﻮﭘﺮﻫﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪H F > HG‬‬ ‫‪q<0‬‬ ‫<‪0‬‬ ‫‪<1‬‬
‫‪q -1‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪٣٧ ۱‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺳﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺳﻮﭘﺮ ﻫﻴﺖ ‪ q‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪CP DT‬‬
‫‪ : q = 1 +‬ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺳﺮﺩ‬ ‫‪>1‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۶۱‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪CP DtT‬‬
‫‪ : q = -‬ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺳﻮﭘﺮﻫﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪<0‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۶۲‬‬
‫‪l‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻚﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫‪N min‬‬ ‫‪ -۹-۶-۷‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ‬

‫‪æ‬‬ ‫‪ö‬‬
‫÷‬
‫ﺣﺪ ‪ . çç‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫÷‪= 1‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ، N min‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ ¥‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻂ ‪ 45°‬ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫‪ç‬‬ ‫‪R +1‬‬ ‫÷‬
‫‪è‬‬ ‫‪R®¥‬‬ ‫‪ø‬‬
‫‪ N min‬ﺑﺎ ﺭﺳﻢ ﭘﻠﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻭ ﺧﻂ ‪ 45°‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻚ ﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫‪R min‬‬ ‫‪ -۱۰-۶-۷‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ‪ R min‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻚﻛﻴﺐ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﻼﻗﻲ ﺧﻂ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﻢ )ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪(M‬‬
‫‪R min‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ R min‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ M‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ D‬ﻭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﻴﺐ ‪ MD‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ‬
‫‪R min + 1‬‬

‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ M‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﻼﻗﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻭ ﺧﻂ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ax‬‬
‫=‪y‬‬
‫‪1 + ( a - 1) x‬‬
‫‪q‬‬ ‫‪Z‬‬
‫=‪y‬‬ ‫‪x- F‬‬
‫‪q -1‬‬ ‫‪q -1‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ M‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ R min‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪x D - yM‬‬ ‫‪R min‬‬
‫= ﺷﻴﺐ ‪MD‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫)‪(۱۶۳‬‬
‫‪x D - x M R min + 1‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ‪ R min‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬
‫) ‪R min = f ( x D , q , ZF , a‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۶۴‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ٣٨‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ‪ Underwood‬ﺍﺳﺖ )ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ‪ 133‬ﻓﺼﻞ ‪ 9‬ﺗﺮﻳﺒﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﺪﻩﺁﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻟﺰﻭﻣﺎﹰ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺗﻼﻗﻲ ﺧﻂ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ‪ R min‬ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ R min‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۱۱-۶-۷‬ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭﺧﻮﺭﺍﻛﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻭ ‪open steam‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻛﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﺧﻂ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪ Mc cabe‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ‪ F1‬ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ‬
‫‪ F2‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ )‪ (۱۵۶‬ﻭ )‪ (۱۵۷‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ‪ F1‬ﻭ ‪ F2‬ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﻪ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪L¢‬‬ ‫‪Dx D - F1ZF1‬‬
‫=‪y‬‬ ‫‪x+‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۶۵‬‬
‫‪G‬‬ ‫‪¢‬‬ ‫‪G¢‬‬
‫‪ L¢‬ﻭ ‪ G ¢‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ‪ F1‬ﻭ ‪ F2‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺑﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﺝ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ‪ ، F1‬ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ F1‬ﻭ ‪ F2‬ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ‪ ( F2‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ìL = RD‬‬
‫‪F1‬‬ ‫‪ íG = R + 1 D‬ﺑﺎﻻﻱ‬
‫‪î‬‬ ‫(‬ ‫)‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪٣٩ ۱‬‬

‫‪ì L¢ = L + q F‬‬
‫‪F2‬‬ ‫‪ í ¢‬ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ F1‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪1 1‬‬
‫‪îG = G + ( q1 - 1) F1‬‬
‫‪ìL = L¢ + q 2 F2‬‬
‫‪F2‬‬ ‫‪ ïí‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ïîG = G ¢ + ( q 2 - 1) F2‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﻼﻗﻲ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ F1‬ﻭ ‪ F2‬ﺑﺎ ﺧﻂ ‪ y = x‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪Dx D - F1ZF1‬‬
‫=‪x‬‬ ‫‪= x DM‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۶۶‬‬
‫‪D - F1‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻭﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﻼﻗﻲ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻂ ‪ y = x‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪) S‬ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ( ﻭ ‪ F‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪L¢‬‬ ‫‪Dx D + Sx s‬‬
‫=‪y‬‬ ‫‪x+‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۶۷‬‬
‫‪G¢‬‬ ‫‪G¢‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ S‬ﻭ ‪ F‬ﺩﺑﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ‪ S‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪L¢ = L - S = RD - S , G ¢ = G = ( R + 1) D‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۶۸‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻨﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺑﻲﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ )‪ (۱۶۷‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪S‬‬ ‫‪S‬‬
‫‪R-‬‬ ‫‪x D + xS‬‬
‫=‪y‬‬ ‫‪D x+‬‬ ‫‪D‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۶۹‬‬
‫‪R +1‬‬ ‫‪R +1‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺁﺏ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ‪ open steam‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻚ ﻛﻴﺐ ﺩﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ )‪ (۱۵۶‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪W‬‬
‫=‪y‬‬ ‫) ‪(x - xw‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۷۰‬‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ) ‪ ( x w , 0‬ﻣﻲﮔﺬﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۸‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺪﺍﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻻﻳﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -۱‬ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺁﺯﺋﻮﺗﺮﻭﭘﻲ‬
‫‪ -۲‬ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻣﺎ‬
‫‪ -۳‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻓﺮﺍﺭﻳﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺣﻼﻝ )‪ (B‬ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ )ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀ ‪ C‬ﻭ ‪ A‬ﺍﺳﺖ( ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻏﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻼﻝ ﺭﺍ ‪ Extract‬ﻭ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺯ ﻏﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ‪ Raffinate‬ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺻﻮﻻﹰ ﺣﻼﻝﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -۱‬ﺣﻼﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻣﺘﺰﺍﺝ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ )‪ ،(A‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺣﻼﻝ ‪ B‬ﻓﻘﻂ ‪ C‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺣﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺎﻣﺤﻠﻮﻟﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ‪ E‬ﻭ ‪ R‬ﺩﻭ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ٤٠‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫‪ -۲‬ﺣﻼﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻣﺘﺰﺍﺝﭘﺬﻳﺮﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺣﻼﻝ ‪ B‬ﻋﻤﺪﺗﺎﹰ ﺟﺰﺀ ‪ C‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺣﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺧﻮﺩ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻢ ﺣﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ‪ E‬ﻭ ‪ R‬ﺳﻪ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺘﺎﹰ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻲ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻲ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ P‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ plait‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪:plait‬‬
‫‪ -۱‬ﻃﻮﻝ ‪ Tie Line‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۲‬ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ‪ E‬ﻭ ‪ R‬ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ) ‪ ( x = y‬ﻭ ﻓﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﺖ‪(b = 1) .‬‬
‫‪ -۳‬ﻛﺸﺶ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻣﻲﺭﺳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﻔﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪ A -۱‬ﻭ ‪ C‬ﻛﺎﻣﻼﹰ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻟﻨﺪ‪ B .‬ﻭ ‪ C‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻛﺎﻣﻼﹰ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻟﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ A -۲‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻢ ﺣﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۳‬ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ‪ pnk‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﺯ ‪ E‬ﻭ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ‪ pmj‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﺯ ‪ R‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻲ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﺎﻧﻜﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺷﻴﺐ ‪ Tie-Line‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ Tie-Jk .‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ‪ xy‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ M‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺳﻮﻟﻮﺗﺮﻭﭘﻴﻚ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ‪ x = y‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺳﻮﻟﻮﺗﺮﻭﭘﻴﻚ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ plait‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺳﻮﻟﻮﺗﺮﻭﭘﻴﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﻭﻓﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﺮﻏﻢ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ‪ x‬ﻭ ‪) y‬ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺟﺰﺀ ‪ C‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ R‬ﻭ ‪ ، (E‬ﻓﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫)‪ ( b ¹ 1‬ﻫﻢﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻃﻮﻝ ‪ Tie‬ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻛﺸﺶ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺨﺎﻟﻒ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻢ ﺣﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ‪ B‬ﻭ ‪ C‬ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻢ ﺣﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ C‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻢ ﺣﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺣﻼﻝ ‪ ،B‬ﺣﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺟﺰﺀ ‪ C‬ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪٤١ ۱‬‬

‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺣﻼﻟﻴﺖ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯﻱ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۱-۸‬ﻓﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻭ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻛﺘﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ) ‪ ( b‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪æCö‬‬ ‫‪ ö‬ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪æ‬‬
‫÷‪çA‬‬ ‫‪ç‬‬ ‫÷‬
‫‪ øE‬ﺟﺰﺀ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ‪è øE è‬‬
‫=‪b‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫)‪(۱۷۱‬‬
‫‪æCö‬‬ ‫‪ ö‬ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪æ‬‬
‫÷‪çA‬‬ ‫‪ç‬‬ ‫÷‬
‫‪ øR‬ﺟﺰﺀ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ‪è øR è‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍ ﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎ )‪ (k‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪CE y‬‬
‫=‪k‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫)‪(۱۷۲‬‬
‫‪CR x‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻁ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡﭘﺬﻳﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ‪ b > 1‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪bx‬‬
‫=‪y‬‬ ‫ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻝ‪ :‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪1 + ( b - 1) x‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺎﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ )ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ( ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ‪ A‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺯ ‪ E‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫‪b= o =¥‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۷۳‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫‪1- x‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ E‬ﻭ ‪ R‬ﺩﻭﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ‪ A‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺯ ‪ R‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ 1 - x‬ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ )‪ : x‬ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ‪ C‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺯ ‪ R‬ﺍﺳﺖ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺳﻪﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻢ ﺣﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ( ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭼﻮﻥ ) ‪ A E ¹ (1 - y‬ﻭ ) ‪ A R ¹ (1 - x‬ﻟﺬﺍ‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫) ‪A ¹ (1 - y‬‬ ‫‪bx‬‬
‫‪b= E‬‬ ‫‪® y¹‬‬
‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪1 + ( b - 1) x‬‬
‫) ‪A R ¹ (1 - x‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ٤٢‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫‪bx‬‬
‫= ‪ y‬ﺻﺎﺩﻕ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ X‬ﻭ ‪ Y‬ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺟﺰﺀ ‪ C‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ R‬ﻭ ‪ E‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﻢ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‬
‫‪1 + ( b - 1) x‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻼﻝ )‪ (B‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪bX‬‬
‫‪b = 1- Y‬‬ ‫=‪® Y‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۷۴‬‬
‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪1 + ( b - 1) X‬‬
‫‪1- X‬‬

‫‪ -۲-۸‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﺴﻮ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﺴﻮ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺎﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ‪ E‬ﻭ ‪ R‬ﺩﻭﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺁﻣﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪Y1 - Ys‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬
‫‪=- s‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۷۵‬‬
‫‪X1 - X F‬‬ ‫‪Es‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪) A‬ﺟﺰﺀ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ( ﻭ ‪) B‬ﺣﻼﻝ( ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻢ ﺣﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻲ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ )ﭼﻮﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺳﻪ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ( ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﺴﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻲ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺧﻂ ‪ FS‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﺣﻼﻝ )‪ (S‬ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺣﻼﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻄﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺁﻣﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﻮﻟﺴﻴﻮﻥ )‪ (M‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ D‬ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻃﺒﻖ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪FD‬‬
‫‪Smin = F.‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۷۶‬‬
‫‪SD‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﻼﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﻮﻟﺴﻴﻮﻥ )‪ (M‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ K‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪FK‬‬
‫‪Smax = F.‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۷۷‬‬
‫‪SK‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪٤٣ ۱‬‬

‫‪ -۳-۸‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﺴﻮ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﺴﻮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻢ ﻧﺎﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ E‬ﻭ ‪ R‬ﺩﻭﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪Y1 - Ys‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬
‫‪= s‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۷۸‬‬
‫‪X F - X N p Es‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻢ ﺣﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ E‬ﻭ ‪ R‬ﺳﻪ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﻪ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻼﻗﻲ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎﻱ ‪ SR N P‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ‪ DR‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫‪ x N P ùû‬ﻳﺎ ‪ = f éëF, x F ,S, ys , y1‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ‪DR‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۷۹‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ‪ DR‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻭ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ‪ ،‬ﺷﺪﺕ ﻭ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺣﻼﻝ ﻭ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺯ ‪ Extract‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Raffinate‬ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻋﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﭘﻮﻧﭽﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ‪ DR‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺣﻼﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﺴﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﻼﻗﻲ ‪ Tie-Line‬ﻭ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ‪ SR N P‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ DR min‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪Tie-Line‬‬ ‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻲ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ‪ SR N P‬ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺩﻭﺭﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﻼﻗﻲ ‪ DR min‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ‪ SR N P‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬

‫ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻲ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻼﻗﻲ ‪ Tie-Line‬ﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ‪ SR N P‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ‪ DR min‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎﹰ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ‪ DR min‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﺐ‬

‫‪ Tie-line‬ﻫﻢ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ )ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ‪ DR‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﺐ ‪ Tie-Line‬ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ(‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ٤٤‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫‪ -۴-۸‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺧﻼﺻﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪Mixer-Setler‬‬ ‫‪ -۱‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ) ‪( 75  100%‬‬ ‫·‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬
‫‪68‬‬ ‫ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻋﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫·‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪-۲‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮﻳﻔﻮﮊﻱ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﻴﺘﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻛﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﻛﻤﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻭﻳﺘﺎﻣﻴﻦﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻨﻲﺳﻴﻠﻴﻦ(‬ ‫·‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮﻳﻔﻮﮊ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 10‬ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬
‫ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﮔﺮﺍﻥﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻭ ﭘﺮﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﺍﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬
‫ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬
‫‪-۳‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ ﭘﺮﺍﻛﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﺩﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﺷﺸﻲ‬ ‫·‬
‫ﻓﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﭘﺮﺍﻛﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻳﺴﻜﻮﺯﻳﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬
‫ﻓﺎﺯ ﭘﺮﺍﻛﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺳﺒﻚ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺸﺶ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻛﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪) .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺮﺍﻛﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬ ‫·‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻀﻮﺭ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬
‫ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻃﻐﻴﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺝ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺑﻲ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻭ ﭘﺮﺍﻛﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ‬ ‫·‬
‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ )ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﻴﺘﻪﻫﺎ( ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 6  24%‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬ ‫·‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻲﺩﺍﺭ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ )‪ (HETP‬ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺷﺸﻲ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ) ‪ ( 5  20 ft‬ﻭ ) ‪ (10  20 ft‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬ ‫·‬
‫ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍﹰ ﻧﺸﺎﻥﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻳﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪٤٥ ۱‬‬

‫)‪(Agitated‬‬ ‫‪ -۴‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺰﻥ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺰﻥ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ‪ RDC‬ﻭ ﺷﻴﺒﻞ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪(80  100% ) .‬‬ ‫·‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ )ﻣﺜﻼﹰ ‪ 40‬ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ(‬ ‫·‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺎﻻﺕ ﺧﻮﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﺎﻝ ﻭﻳﺴﻜﻮﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺷﻴﺒﻞ ﺑﻪ ‪ RDC‬ﺍﺭﺟﺤﻴﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬
‫ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﻧﻲ )‪(pulsed‬‬ ‫‪-٥‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺝ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 3‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺮﺝ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ‬ ‫·‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻲﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﭘﺎﻟﺴﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺎﻻﺕ ﺧﻮﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺯﺩﻳﺎﺩ ﺿﺮﺑﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫·‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪۲‬‬
‫‪ -۹‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺳﻨﺠﻲ )‪(Humidification‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺧﺸﻚ ‪ B‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ‪ A‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ‪ A‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﮔﺎﺯ ‪ ، B‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﮔﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۱-۹‬ﺗﻌﺎﺭﻳﻒ ﻭ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ -۱‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ )‪(Absolute Humidity‬‬
‫‪kg A‬‬ ‫‪kg H 2 O‬‬
‫= ‪Y¢‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫)‪(١٨٠‬‬
‫‪kg B kg Dry Air‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﺪﻩﺁﻝ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﺯ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪MA‬‬ ‫‪PA‬‬
‫= ‪Y¢‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۸۱‬‬
‫‪M B Pt - PA‬‬
‫‪ M A‬ﻭ ‪ M B‬ﺟﺮﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﻜﻮﻟﻲ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۲‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ )‪(Saturated Humidity‬‬

‫‪MA‬‬ ‫‪PAsat‬‬
‫= ‪Ys¢‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۸۲‬‬
‫‪M B Pt - PAsat‬‬

‫‪ : PAsat‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺟﺰﺀ ‪) A‬ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﻣﺎﺳﺖ(‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪٤٧ ۲‬‬

‫)‪(Relative Humidity‬‬ ‫‪ -۳‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ‬

‫‪PA‬‬
‫= ‪RH%‬‬ ‫‪´ 100‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۸۳‬‬
‫‪PAsat‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(Percentage Humidity‬‬ ‫‪ -۴‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫‪Y¢‬‬ ‫‪P P - PAsat‬‬
‫= ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬ ‫‪´ 100 = A . t‬‬ ‫‪´ 100‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۸۴‬‬
‫‪Ys¢‬‬ ‫‪PAsat Pt - PA‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۵‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ )‪(Humid Volume‬‬
‫‪vH‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺧﺸﻚ )‪ (B‬ﻭ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺁﻥ )‪ (A‬ﺍﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۶‬ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ )‪(Humid Volume‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺧﺸﻚ )‪ (B‬ﻭ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲﮔﺮﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪Cs = CB + Y¢CA‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۸۵‬‬
‫‪ CA‬ﻭ ‪ CB‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻳﻲ ‪) A‬ﺁﺏ( ﻭ ‪) B‬ﻫﻮﺍ( ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۲-۹‬ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺳﻨﺠﻲ‬

‫ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺳﻨﺠﻲ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﮔﺎﺯ ) ‪ ( Y¢‬ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﻣﺎ ) ‪ ( T‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﺻﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﻣﺎ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺟﻮﺵ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ) ‪ ( t bp‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﻲﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻴﻞ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ‪:‬‬
‫‪T = t bp‬‬ ‫‪® PAsat = Pt‬‬ ‫‪® Ys¢ = ¥‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۸۶‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ٤٨‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫)‪(Dew Point‬‬ ‫‪ -۳-۹‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺷﺒﻨﻢ‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺮﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﺩﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ 100%‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺷﺒﻨﻢ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺜﻼﹰ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺷﺒﻨﻢ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ )‪ (F‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺷﺒﻨﻢ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﮔﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻛﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺛﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺷﺒﻨﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﻄﻪ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫)‪ (100%‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺳﻨﺠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ‪ .( Ys¢‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ )ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ‪ ( Ys¢‬ﻭ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ‬
‫ﮔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺷﺒﻨﻢ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺎﺯﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺷﺒﻨﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺳﺮﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ Y2¢ < Y1¢‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻨﺪﺍﻧﺲ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺴﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﻲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺷﻴﺸﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺯﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻮﺍ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺷﺒﻨﻢ ﮔﺎﺯ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ ﺟﺎﺫﺏ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﻪ )ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻠﻴﻜﺎﮊﻝ( ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪٤٩ ۲‬‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﭼﻨﺪﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﻜﻨﺪ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﮔﺎﺯ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮﻱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۴-۹‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺁﺩﻳﺎﺑﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ‪ YG¢‬ﻭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ‪ t G‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺏ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺁﺩﻳﺎﺑﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺁﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ Yas¢‬ﻭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ‪) t as‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺁﺩﻳﺎﺑﺎﺗﻴﻚ( ﻣﻲﺭﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪CS ( t G - t aS ) = ( Yas‬‬
‫‪¢ - YG¢ ) l‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۸۷‬‬
‫‪Cs‬‬
‫‪YG¢ - Ys¢ = -‬‬ ‫) ‪( t G - t as‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۸۸‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪Cs‬‬
‫‪) -‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖﺳﻨﺠﻲ ﺧﻄﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻴﺐ‬
‫‪l‬‬

‫‪ -۵-۹‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ‬

‫ﺩﻣﺎﺳﻨﺠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺧﺸﻜﻲ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻴﭽﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ‪) t G‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﺧﺸﻚ( ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻴﺲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﻣﺎﺳﻨﺞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﻢ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺏ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﺁﺏ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺩﻣﺎﺳﻨﺞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻫﻮﺍ ﻣﻲﺭﺳﺪ )‪ .(Wet Bulb‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫‪h G ( t G - t w ) = K y ( Yw¢ - YG¢ ) l‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۸۹‬‬

‫‪hG‬‬
‫‪YG¢ - Yw¢ = -‬‬ ‫) ‪( tG - t w‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۹۰‬‬
‫‪K yl‬‬

‫‪ : Yw¢‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ‪ : YG¢ ،‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﺩﺓ ﻫﻮﺍ ﻭ ‪ : l‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻱ ﻧﻬﺎﻥ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﺁﺏ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ‬
‫‪hG‬‬
‫‪ . -‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺷﻴﺐ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﺐ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺁﺩﻳﺎﺑﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﺐ‬
‫‪K yl‬‬

‫ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖﺳﻨﺠﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪:‬‬

‫‪hG‬‬
‫= ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺳﻨﺠﻲ‬ ‫)‪(۱۹۱‬‬
‫‪K y Cs‬‬

‫‪ : h G‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ Re‬ﻭ ‪ Pr‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ‪: K y‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ Sc‬ﻭ ‪ Re‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺳﻨﺠﻲ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻟﻮﺋﻴﺲ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪hG‬‬
‫‪= Le0.567‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۹۲‬‬
‫‪K y Cs‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﻮﺍ ـ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺁﺏ ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ Le = 1‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻟﺬﺍ‪:‬‬

‫‪hG‬‬
‫‪= 1 ® t w = t as‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۹۳‬‬
‫‪K y Cs‬‬

‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺁﺩﻳﺎﺑﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﻫﻮﺍ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﺧﺸﻚ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻫﻮﺍ ) ‪ ( t G - t w‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۶-۹‬ﻛﻮﻟﺮ ﺁﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﻮﻟﺮ ﺁﺑﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺁﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﺁﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﻥ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﺁﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺬﺍ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻫﻮﺍ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻭ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻮﻟﺮ ﺁﺑﻲ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫ﻋﺎﻣﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻮﻟﺮ ﺁﺑﻲ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﻨﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻫﻮﺍ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﺁﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﺳﺖ ) ‪( Ty > Ti‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪٥١ ۲‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﻮﻟﺮ ﺁﺑﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺩﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻮﻟﺮ ﺁﺑﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻴﺪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻫﻮﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺁﺏ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻮﻟﺮ ﺁﺑﻲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎﹰ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ‪ Wet Bulb‬ﻫﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﺁﺏ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻛﻮﻟﺮ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺷﺮﺟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﺧﺸﻚ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻫﻮﺍ ﻧﺎﭼﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺧﻨﻚﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﭼﻨﺪﺍﻧﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻛﻮﻟﺮ ﺁﺑﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻛﻮﻟﺮ ﺁﺑﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻮﻟﺮ ﺁﺑﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻮﻟﺮ ﺁﺑﻲ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻭ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﻭ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۷-۹‬ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻨﻚﻛﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻦ ﺁﺏ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﺒﺪﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﭘﻠﻨﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺧﻨﻚﻛﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺧﻨﻚﻛﻦ ﻋﺎﻣﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺧﻨﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺁﺏ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﺁﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﺁﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫) ‪ + ( 2 ~ 5°c‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ = ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺁﺏ ﺧﻨﻚ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺧﻨﻚ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻦ‬ ‫)‪(۱۹۴‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺁﺏ ﺧﻨﻚ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﻲ ﻳﺎ ‪ DTApp r oach‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪DTApp r oach = 2 ~ 5°c‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۹۵‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ٥٢‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ t w = 24°c‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺁﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 26‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 29°c‬ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺁﺏ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺧﻨﻚﻛﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻫﺪﺭ ﺭﻓﺖ ﺁﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪:‬‬
‫ﻫﺪﺭ ﺭﻓﺖ ﺁﺏ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﺁﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻫﻮﺍ )‪(E‬‬ ‫‪-۱‬‬
‫‪ -۲‬ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺁﺑﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ )‪ D‬ﻳﺎ ‪(Drift‬‬
‫‪ -۳‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﻐﻠﻴﻆ ﺁﺏ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﻄﻪ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﻧﻤﻚ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﻣﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺯﺩﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﻧﻤﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺏ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﻚ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺏ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﻚ ﻛﻢ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ )‪ B‬ﻳﺎ ‪(Blow Down‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﺏ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻧﻲ )‪ (Make up‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺪﺭ ﺭﻓﺖ ﺁﺏ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ‪ 3‬ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪Make up = E + D + E‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۹۶‬‬
‫ﺩﺑﻲ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ‪ Make up‬ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 2‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 3‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺩﺑﻲ ﺁﺏ ﭼﺮﺧﺸﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﻣﺎ ﻭ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺧﻨﻚﻛﻦ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫‪ -۱۰‬ﺧﺸﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ )‪(Drying‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺑﻲ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺧﺸﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺃﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺸﻚﻛﻦﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩ ﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -۱‬ﺧﺸﻚﻛﻦﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ )‪(Direct‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺸﻚﻛﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﻍ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺧﺸﻚ ﻛﻦ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺸﻚﻛﻦﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺩﻳﺎﺑﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺧﺸﻚﻛﻦ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۲‬ﺧﺸﻚﻛﻦﻫﺎﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ )‪(Indirect‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪٥٣ ۲‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺸﻚﻛﻦﻫﺎ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺧﺸﻚﻛﻦ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ steam‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺪﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺧﺸﻚﻛﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺸﻚﻛﻦﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺸﻚﻛﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺁﺩﻳﺎﺑﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺸﻚﻛﻦﻫﺎ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺸﻚﻛﻦﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ )‪ (Batch‬ﻭ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ )‪ (continuous‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪kg‬‬ ‫‪kg‬‬
‫‪ 1000‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺸﻚﻛﻦ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪ 50‬ﺣﺘﻤﺎﹰ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺸﻚﻛﻦ ﻧﺎﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫‪hr‬‬ ‫‪hr‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 50‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 1000‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ ﺑﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺸﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻏﺬﺍﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﻭﻳﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺸﻚﻛﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﺸﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺧﺸﻚﻛﻦﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﺷﺸﻲ‬
‫)‪ (Spray Dryer‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﻧﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﻤﺔ ﺧﺸﻚﻛﻦﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‬
‫)‪(t < 30sec‬‬

‫‪ -۱-۱۰‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺁﻥ‬

‫ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -۱‬ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ )‪ : (Wet Basis‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ )ﻫﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻛﺴﺮ ﻭﺯﻧﻲ(‬
‫‪ -۲‬ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺧﺸﻚ )‪ : (Dry Basis‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻛﻴﻠﻮﮔﺮﻡ ﺟﺎﻡ ﺧﺸﻚ‬
‫‪kg H 2 O‬‬
‫=‪X‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۹۷‬‬
‫‪kg Dry Solid‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﺎﺕ ﺧﺸﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۱-۱-۱۰‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻟﻲ )‪ (Equilibrium Moisture‬ﻭ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ )‪(Free Moisture‬‬

‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺸﻚ ﻛﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻟﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻟﻲ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ )ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ(‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ٥٤‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫*‬
‫‪Free Moisture = X1 - X = f‬‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻟﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺧﺸﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪æ*ö‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺟﺴﻢ ) ‪ ( X1‬ﻭ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻟﻲ ÷÷ ‪ çç X‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪è ø‬‬
‫)ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﻫﻮﺍ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ(‬

‫‪ -۲-۱-۱۰‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪﻱ )‪ (Bound‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪﻱ )‪(unbound‬‬

‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪﻱ )‪ (Bound Moisture‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﭼﺴﺒﻴﺪﻩ ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﻑ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﺏ ﺗﺒﻠﻮﺭ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪﻱ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪﻱ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪﻱ )‪ (unbound Moisture‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﻣﺎﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﺏﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻭ ﺁﺏ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺧﻠﻞ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺝ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪﻱ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ )‪ (RH = 100%‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﻼﹰ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ) ‪ ( X B‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻟﻲ ﻭ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﻤﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ A‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺧﺸﻚﻛﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺮﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪﻱ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪﻱ ) ‪ ( X B‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ X B‬ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﻼﹰ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۲-۱۰‬ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ‬

‫ﺷﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ )‪ (N‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪1 dm t‬‬
‫‪N=-‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۹۸‬‬
‫‪A dt‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪٥٥ ۲‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ‪ : m t‬ﺟﺮﻡ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻭ ‪ : A‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Ls‬ﺟﺮﻡ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﺧﺸﻚ ﻭ ‪ m w‬ﺟﺮﻡ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪m w = m t - Ls‬‬ ‫)‪(۱۹۹‬‬
‫‪m t - Ls‬‬
‫=‪X‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۰۰‬‬
‫‪Ls‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ‪:‬‬
‫‪Ls dX‬‬
‫‪N=-‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۰۱‬‬
‫‪A dt‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﺑﺎﺭﻳﻜﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺁﻥ )‪ (S‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﻮﺍ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﻧﺴﻴﺘﻪ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﺧﺸﻚ ‪ rs‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫) ‪Ls = rs ( 2SA 0‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪A = 2A 0‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ‪ A0‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﺗﻴﻐﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻟﺬﺍ‬
‫‪rs ( 2SA 0 ) dx‬‬ ‫‪dx‬‬
‫‪N=-‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪® N = -Srs‬‬
‫‪2 A0‬‬ ‫‪dt‬‬ ‫‪dt‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ )‪ (Drying Curve‬ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺷﺎﺭ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ )‪ (N‬ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺟﺴﻢ )‪ (X‬ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۱-۲-۱۰‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺟﺎﻣﺪﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺨﻠﺨﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺳﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۱‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ )‪ (AB‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﺳﺮﺩﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﺸﻚﻛﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺭ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۲‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )‪(BC‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺁﺏﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﺩﺍﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻲﻣﺎﻧﺪ )‪ .(Constant Rate‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﻃﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺸﻚ ﻛﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ Direct‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ( ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﺻﺮﻓﻨﻈﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﺧﺸﻚﻛﻦ ‪ Indirect‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺟﻮﺵ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ٥٦‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﺸﻚ ﻛﻦ ‪ Direct‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ Nc ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫) ‪h ( tG - t w‬‬
‫= ‪Nc‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۰۲‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ‪ : t G‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﺧﺸﻚ ﻫﻮﺍ‪ : t w ،‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻫﻮﺍ‪ : h ،‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ‪ l‬ﮔﺮﻣﺎﻱ ﻧﻬﺎﻥ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪ Constant Rate‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ‪ h‬ﻫﻮﺍ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﺧﺸﻚ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ‬
‫ﻫﻮﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺎﺁﺭﺍﻡ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺗﺨﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪h ~ u 0.8‬‬
‫‪¥‬‬ ‫‪® N c ~ u 0.8‬‬
‫‪¥‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۰۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪h ~ u 0.37‬‬
‫‪¥‬‬ ‫‪® N c ~ u 0.37‬‬
‫‪¥‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۰۴‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ )‪:(۲۰۲‬‬
‫) ‪Nc ~ ( t G - t w‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۰۵‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﺧﺸﻚ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺳﻨﺠﻲ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﻫﻮﺍ )‪ (RH‬ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﺧﺸﻚ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﻋﻤﺪﻩ ﺁﺏ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺭﻳﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫)‪(Falling Rate‬‬ ‫‪ -۳‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﮕﻲ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﻟﻜﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺸﻜﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺘﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺭﻳﺖ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻓﻴﻚ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺠﺬﻭﺭ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬

‫) (‬
‫‪ S2‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﺧﺸﻚ ﻫﻮﺍ‬
‫) ‪ ( t G‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺤﺮﺍﻧﻲ ) ‪ ( Xc‬ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۲-۲-۱۰‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻣﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺨﻠﺨﻞ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﻣﺘﺨﻠﺨﻞ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻜﻞ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺧﺸﻚ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻥ ﺟﺎﻣﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﺨﻠﺨﻞ )‪ (porous‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪٥٧ ۲‬‬

‫‪ -۱‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺩﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ )‪ (AB‬ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻣﺪﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺨﻠﺨﻞ‬

‫‪ -۲‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ )‪ (BC‬ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻣﺪﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺨﻠﺨﻞ‬
‫‪ -٣‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻣﻮﺋﻴﻨﮕﻲ )‪(CD) (Capillary‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺁﺏ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻟﻮﻟﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﻳﻴﻦ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺍﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻲﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺍﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻛﻞ )ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺧﺸﻚ( ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺧﺸﻚ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﺛﺮﮔﺬﺍﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪ Capillary‬ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪ Constant Rate‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۴‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺭﻳﺖ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ )‪(DE‬‬

‫ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺭﻳﺖ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻣﺪﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺨﻠﺨﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۳-۱۰‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ )‪ (۲۰۱‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪Ls‬‬ ‫‪X2‬‬ ‫‪dx‬‬
‫‪t=-‬‬
‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪òX‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪N‬‬
‫)‪(۲۰۶‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪ constant Rate‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪Ls‬‬
‫=‪t‬‬ ‫) ‪( X1 - X 2‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۰۷‬‬
‫‪AN c‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺭﻳﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ )‪(S‬‬ ‫‪(۱‬‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ) ‪ ( N c‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻟﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫~‪t‬‬ ‫~‪® t‬‬ ‫~‪,t‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۰۸‬‬
‫‪Nc‬‬ ‫‪h‬‬ ‫) ‪( tG - t w‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﻮﺍ ) ‪ ( u ¥‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﺧﺸﻚ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ٥٨‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺭﻳﺖ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪ N‬ﺑﺎ ‪ X‬ﺧﻄﻲ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪N = aX + b‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۰۹‬‬
‫‪Nc‬‬ ‫‪æ‬‬ ‫‪ö‬‬
‫*‬
‫=‪N‬‬ ‫÷÷ ‪çç X - X‬‬
‫*‬
‫)‪(۲۱۰‬‬
‫‪Xc - X è‬‬ ‫‪ø‬‬

‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪X2‬‬ ‫‪dx‬‬ ‫‪L æ‬‬ ‫‪*ö‬‬ ‫‪X -X‬‬
‫‪t=- s‬‬
‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪òX‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪Nc æ‬‬ ‫‪*ö‬‬
‫‪= s çç X c - X ÷÷ Ln 1‬‬
‫‪AN c è‬‬ ‫‪ø‬‬ ‫*‬
‫)‪(۲۱۱‬‬
‫‪ç‬‬ ‫÷÷ ‪X - X‬‬ ‫‪X2 - X‬‬
‫*‬ ‫‪ç‬‬
‫‪Xc - X è‬‬ ‫‪ø‬‬

‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺭﻳﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ ) ‪ ( X1 > Xc‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺭﻳﺖ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ ) ‪ ( X 2 < Xc‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺸﻚ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪é‬‬ ‫‪* ù‬‬
‫‪Ls ê‬‬ ‫‪æ‬‬ ‫‪*ö‬‬ ‫‪Xc - X ú‬‬
‫=‪t‬‬ ‫‪( X1 - Xc ) + çç Xc - X ÷÷ Ln‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۱۲‬‬
‫‪AN c ê‬‬ ‫‪è‬‬ ‫‪ø‬‬ ‫‪*ú‬‬
‫‪êë‬‬ ‫‪X 2 - X úû‬‬

‫‪ -۴-۱۰‬ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺸﻚﻛﻦﻫﺎ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺸﻚﻛﻦ ‪ Batch‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺸﻚﻛﻦ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻜﻞﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪) Constant Rate‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪ (BC‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻲﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ﺻﺮﻓﺎﹰ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﺁﺏ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺭﻳﺖ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﻟﻜﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺭﻳﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ) ‪ ( Ti‬ﺩﺭ ﺧﺸﻚﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Direct‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻫﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺸﻚﻛﻦﻫﺎﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ )‪ (Indirect‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺟﻮﺵ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Tsin‬ﻭ ‪ Tsout‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺸﻚﻛﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺸﻚﻛﻦ ‪ Direct‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪æ Th - Tw‬‬ ‫‪ö‬‬
‫‪NTU = Ln ç in‬‬ ‫÷‬ ‫)‪(۲۱۳‬‬
‫‪ç Th - Tw‬‬ ‫÷‬
‫‪è out‬‬ ‫‪ø‬‬
‫‪ Thin‬ﻭ ‪ Th out‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﮔﺮﻡ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ‪ Tw‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻫﻮﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪٥٩ ۲‬‬

‫‪ -۱۱‬ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎ )‪(Evaporator‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﻲ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺣﻼﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺟﻮﺵ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻼﹰ ﺟﺎﻣﺪﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﮔﺎﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺨﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺃﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺗﻐﻠﻴﻆ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺭﻭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﻤﻞ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺷﻴﺮﻳﻦﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺁﺏ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺨﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭼﮕﺎﻟﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺁﺏ ﺷﻴﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻊﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ‪ steam‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﻴﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﻡﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ x F .‬ﻭ ‪ x L‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ )ﻛﺴﺮ ﻭﺯﻧﻲ( ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻠﻴﻆ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ V .‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﻪ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪F = L+V‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۱۴‬‬
‫‪Fx F = Lx L‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۱۵‬‬
‫‪FH F + Sls = LH L + VH v‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۱۶‬‬
‫‪Q = Sls = u .A. Dt‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۱۷‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ‪ :Q‬ﺑﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ : u ،‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻭ ‪ : Dt‬ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ‪ Steam‬ﻭ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ )‪ (Capacity‬ﻭ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ )‪ (Economy‬ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪Capacity = V‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۱۸‬‬
‫‪V‬‬
‫= ‪Economy‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۱۹‬‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺯﺩﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -۱‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ -۲‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ٦٠‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫‪ -۱-۱۱‬ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪﺍﻱ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪﺍﻱ ‪ 4‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙﺩﻫﻲ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -۱‬ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙﺩﻫﻲ ‪Forward‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻣﺎ ﻭﻳﺴﻜﻮﺯﻳﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻐﻠﻴﻆ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﻳﺴﻜﻮﺯﻳﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۲‬ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙﺩﻫﻲ ‪Backward‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻤﭗ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﻭﻳﺴﻜﻮﺯﻳﺘﻪ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﺍﺯﺩﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﻣﺎ ﻭﻳﺴﻜﻮﺯﻳﺘﻪ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻛﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻠﻴﻆ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻭﻳﺴﻜﻮﺯﻳﺘﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۳‬ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙﺩﻫﻲ ‪Mixed‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ‪ forward‬ﻭ ‪ backward‬ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻣﻲﺍﻓﺘﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺐ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﻣﻨﺪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ )‪ (Mixed‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﺕ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻢ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ forward‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ backward‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﻳﺴﻜﻮﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙﺩﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ )‪ (forward‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﻳﺴﻜﻮﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ‪ Backward‬ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﻢ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺗﻐﻠﻴﻆ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻂ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -۴‬ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙﺩﻫﻲ ‪Parallel‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻠﻴﻆ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﺒﻠﻮﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪E » 0.9 N‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۲۰‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ‪ : N‬ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎﹰ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ 2.7‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺓﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 8‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 12‬ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﻏﻴﺮﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 3‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 5‬ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۲-۱۱‬ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻤﭙﺮﺳﻮﺭ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ‪ steam‬ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺨﻠﻮﻁ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ 10‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 14‬ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪٦١ ۲‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻠﻴﻆ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﺍﻛﺘﻴﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻐﻠﻴﻆ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺁﻏﺸﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫)‪(BPE‬‬ ‫‪ -۳-۱۱‬ﺻﻌﻮﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺟﻮﺵ‬

‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺎﺧﺎﻟﺼﻲ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺻﻌﻮﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺟﻮﺵ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ BPE .‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺟﻮﺵ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫ﺟﻮﺵ ﺣﻼﻝ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ‪:‬‬
‫‪BPE = t - t ¢‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۲۱‬‬
‫‪ : t‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺟﻮﺵ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻭ ‪ t ¢‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺁﺏ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺁﺏ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ )ﺣﻼﻝ( ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺟﻮﺵ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻫﻢ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺻﻌﻮﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺟﻮﺵ )‪ (BPE‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻮﭘﺮﻫﻴﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ BPE ¹ 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ BPE = 0‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ‪ NaOH‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﺏ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺗﻤﺴﻔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ‪ 135°c‬ﻣﻲﺟﻮﺷﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻛﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺏ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ‪60°c‬‬
‫ﺑﺠﻮﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲﺟﻮﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪BPE = 135 - 100 = 35°c‬‬ ‫‪P1 = 1atm‬‬
‫‪BPE = 35 = t 2 - 60‬‬ ‫‪P2 < 1atm‬‬
‫‪t 2 = 95°c‬‬
‫‪ -۴-۱۱‬ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪﺍﻱ‬
‫‪ = t s‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ‬
‫‪Dt1‬‬

‫‪ = t1‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ‬

‫‪BPE1‬‬

‫‪ = t1¢‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺁﺏ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ‬

‫‪Dt 2‬‬

‫‪ = t 2‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺟﻮﺵ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ‬

‫‪BPE 2‬‬
‫‪ = t ¢2‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺁﺏ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ‬
‫‪Dt 3‬‬
‫‪ = t 3‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺟﻮﺵ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺳﻮﻡ‬
‫‪BPE3‬‬
‫‪ = t 3¢‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺁﺏ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺳﻮﻡ‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ٦٢‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﻪ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ﺳﻮﭘﺮﻫﻴﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ )‪ (V‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ‪ BPE‬ﻛﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﻧﻘﺶ ‪ steam‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﻔﺎ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ‪:‬‬
‫‪ Dt = t s - t 3¢‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ‬ ‫)‪(۲۲۲‬‬
‫‪ Dt = Dt1 + Dt 2 + Dt 3‬ﻣﻮﺛﺮ‬ ‫)‪(۲۲۳‬‬
‫‪Dt1 = t s - t1‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۲۴‬‬
‫‪Dt 2 = t1¢ - t 2‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۲۵‬‬
‫‪Dt 3 = t ¢2 - t 3‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۲۶‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪ Dt‬ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﻭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ Dt -‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ = ‪ Dt‬ﻣﺆﺛﺮ‬ ‫‪å BPEi‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۲۷‬‬
‫‪ Dt‬ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪u1‬‬
‫= ‪Dt1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ‪. Dt‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۲۸‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪å‬‬ ‫‪ui‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪u2‬‬
‫= ‪Dt 2‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ‪. Dt‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۲۹‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪å‬‬ ‫‪ui‬‬
‫) ‪ - ( Dt1 + Dt 2‬ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ‪Dt 3 = Dt‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۳۰‬‬
‫‪ u1‬ﻭ ‪ u 2‬ﻭ … ﺿﺮﺍﻳﺐ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۵-۱۱‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫)‪(shell & Tube‬‬ ‫‪ -۱‬ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ‬
‫)‪(Agitated‬‬ ‫‪ -۲‬ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻤﺰﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫)‪(Falling film‬‬ ‫‪ -۱‬ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﻳﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺭﻳﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻮﻟﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ‪ steam‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﻴﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻠﻴﻆ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻣﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(Forced Circulation‬‬ ‫‪ -۲‬ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﺍﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪٦٣ ۲‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺗﻐﻠﻴﻆ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺗﻐﻠﻴﻆ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ) ‪ = x L - x F‬ﺑﺰﺭﮒ(‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻠﻴﻆ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺴﻜﻮﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺘﺴﺘﻨﺪ )ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﺖ ‪ h‬ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ( ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻐﻠﻴﻆ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺧﻮﺭﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫)ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ‪ (NaOH‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻠﻴﻆ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺧﻮﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺟﻨﺲ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﻠﺰﺍﺕ ﮔﺮﺍﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﻴﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻴﺘﺎﻧﻴﻮﻡ ﻭ‬
‫…( ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ‪ h‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻢﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻐﻠﻴﻆ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻒﺯﺍ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺟﺪﺍﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻓﻞ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻳﺴﻜﻮﺯﻳﺘﻪ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻛﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺵ ‪ Natural Circulation‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮﻟﻲ ﺩﺳﺖ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻫﻤﺰﻥﺩﺍﺭ )‪ (Agitated‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻭﻳﺴﻜﻮﺯﻳﺘﻪ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺧﻴﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﻣﺜﻼﹰ‪ 1000 :‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲﭘﻮﺍﺯ(‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۱۲‬ﺟﺬﺏ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ )‪(Adsorption‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺰﺀ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺳﻴﺎﻝ )ﮔﺎﺯ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ( ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺳﻴﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﻛﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﻙ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼﹰ ﭘﺴﺎﺏ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺁﺏ ﻓﻠﺰﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ‪ 20 ppm‬ﻓﻠﺰ ﻛﺎﺩﻣﻴﻢ )‪ (Cd‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺴﺖ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﻓﻠﺰﺍﺕ ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺴﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ‪ 1 ppm‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧﺪ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﻙ ﻛﺎﺩﻣﻴﻢ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺟﺎﺫﺏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻭﻳﮋﺓ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻬﻢﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺟﺎﺫﺏﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺯﺋﻮﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﻮﻣﻴﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻠﻴﻜﺎﮊﻝ ﻭ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺑﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻟﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺟﺎﺫﺏ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺟﺎﺫﺏ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺟﺎﺫﺑﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ‪ Y‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ X ،‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ(‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺟﺎﺫﺏ ‪ III‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺫﺏ ‪ II‬ﻭ ﺟﺎﺫﺏ ‪ II‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﺫﺏ ‪ I‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺟﺪﺍﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺟﺎﺫﺏ ‪ III‬ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﺫﺏ ‪ II‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ I‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﺫﺏ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﺫﺏ ‪ III‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺟﺪﺍﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ٦٤‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻄﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻓﺮﻧﺪﻟﻴﭻ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪Y = mX n‬‬ ‫)‪(۲۳۱‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺟﺎﺫﺏ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺟﺎﺫﺑﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ‪ n‬ﺑﺰﺭﮒ ﻭ ‪ m‬ﻛﻮﭼﻜﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺟﺎﺫﺏﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺏ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ‪ n‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ‪ 2‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 10‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -۱-۱۲‬ﺟﺬﺏ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ Co‬ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺣﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ *‪ C‬ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻟﻲ ﺣﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ Co - C* ،‬ﺟﺬﺏ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ‬
‫)‪(a‬‬ ‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﻭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ )ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺬﺏ( ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺟﺬﺏ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ‪ ABC‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ B‬ﺗﺎ ‪ C‬ﺟﺬﺏ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺣﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬

‫) (‬
‫ﺟﺬﺏ *‪ C‬ﺍﺯ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺁﻥ ) ‪ ( Co‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺭﻗﺎﺑﺘﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﻼﻝ ﻭ ﺣﻞﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ BC‬ﺣﻼﻝ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﻞ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺟﺎﺫﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺣﻞﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺣﺬﺏ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪٦٥ ۲‬‬

‫‪ -۳-۱۲‬ﺟﺬﺏ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺴﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﺫﺏ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺬﺷﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻻﻳﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ ﺟﺎﺫﺏ‬
‫ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ ﺟﺎﺫﺏ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻠﻈﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻭﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ ﺟﺎﺫﺏ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ t 3‬ﻋﻤﻼﹰ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺣﻞﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﮔﺬﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ) ‪ ( Break Po int , t b‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 0.05‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 0.1‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ‪ Break Through‬ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻧﺎﮔﻬﺎﻧﻲ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻣﻮﺝ ﺟﺬﺏ‬
‫)‪ (Adsorption Wave‬ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺑﻲ ﻭ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ )ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺑﻲﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻏﻠﻈﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻫﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ(‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪) .‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﻳﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ(‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﺎﺫﺏ ﻫﻢ ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺒﻊ ﺁﻥ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺟﺎﺫﺏ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺣﻼﻝ ‪ Elution‬ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ۱۳‬ـ ‪ ۱‬ـ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻻﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪﻱ‬
‫‪ 1‬ـ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻋﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻔﺘﺎﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﻱ ‪ V0‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ﻛﺮﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻔﺘﺎﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ L‬ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻭﻳﮋﺓ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ ‪ a‬ﻭ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ‪ k c‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﻧﻔﺘﺎﻟﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎﹰ ﭼﻪﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ )ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻧﻔﺘﺎﻟﻴﻦ *‪ ، P‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ‪ T‬ﻭ ‪ R‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻋﻤـﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎﺳﺖ‪(.‬‬

‫*‪2P‬‬ ‫*‪P‬‬
‫= ‪CAout‬‬ ‫‪(۲‬‬ ‫= ‪CAout‬‬ ‫‪(۱‬‬
‫‪æ‬‬ ‫‪2V0 ö‬‬ ‫‪æ‬‬ ‫‪2V0 ö‬‬
‫‪RT ç 1 +‬‬ ‫÷‬ ‫‪RT ç 1 +‬‬ ‫÷‬
‫‪è‬‬ ‫‪aLk‬‬ ‫‪c ø‬‬ ‫‪è‬‬ ‫‪aLk‬‬ ‫‪c ø‬‬

‫*‪2P‬‬ ‫*‪P‬‬
‫= ‪CAout‬‬ ‫‪(۴‬‬ ‫= ‪CAout‬‬ ‫‪(۳‬‬
‫‪æ‬‬ ‫‪V ö‬‬ ‫‪æ‬‬ ‫‪V ö‬‬
‫÷ ‪RT ç 1 + 0‬‬ ‫÷ ‪RT ç 1 + 0‬‬
‫‪è‬‬ ‫‪aLk‬‬ ‫‪c ø‬‬ ‫‪è‬‬ ‫‪aLk‬‬ ‫‪c ø‬‬

‫‪ 2‬ـ ﻧﻔﺘﺎﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ‪ L‬ﻭ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ‪ R‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﻛﻦ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎﹰ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘـﺎﻝ ﺟـﺮﻡ‬
‫*‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪ m‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ‪) :‬ﺟﺮﻡ ﻣﻮﻟﻜﻮﻟﻲ ‪ M A : A‬ﻭ ﻏﻠﻄﺖ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺍﻧﻪ )ﺣﺪ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ( ‪( CA :‬‬

‫= ‪A‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫(‬
‫‪2pLM A D AB CA - CA‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪) (۲‬‬ ‫= ‪A‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫(‬ ‫*‬
‫‪2pLM A D AB CA - CA‬‬ ‫‪) (۱‬‬
‫) ‪(1 - x A ) ( r - R‬‬ ‫‪æ r ö‬‬
‫÷ ‪Ln ç‬‬
‫‪èRø‬‬

‫= ‪A‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫(‬
‫‪2pLM A D AB CA - CA‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪) (۴‬‬ ‫= ‪A‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫(‬ ‫*‬
‫‪2pLM A D AB CA - CA‬‬ ‫‪) (۳‬‬
‫‪r-R‬‬
‫‪(1 - x A ) Ln æç‬‬
‫‪r ö‬‬
‫÷‬
‫‪è ø‬‬
‫‪R‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺳﻮﺍﻻﺕ ‪٦٧‬‬

‫‪m2‬‬
‫‪ D AB = 2 ´ 10-9‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔـﺮ ﺩﻣـﺎﻱ ﻣﺤـﻮﻝ ﺑـﻪ ‪ 330 k‬ﺍﻓـﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﺑـﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ـ ﺩﺭ ‪ T = 300 k‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ‪ A‬ﺩﺭ ‪ B‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ‪،A‬‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪m2‬‬
‫ﭼﻪﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺴﻜﻮﺯﻳﺘﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ‪ %45‬ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ‬
‫‪s‬‬
‫‪m2‬‬ ‫‪m2‬‬ ‫‪m2‬‬ ‫‪m2‬‬
‫‪4.9 ´ 10-9‬‬ ‫‪(۴‬‬ ‫‪2.3 ´ 10-9‬‬ ‫‪(۳‬‬ ‫‪4 ´ 10-9‬‬ ‫‪(۲‬‬ ‫‪2.2 ´ 10-9‬‬ ‫‪(۱‬‬
‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ـ ﻭﺍﻛﻨﺶ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ) ‪ 3A( g ) + B( s ) ® C( g‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻛﺎﺗﺎﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲﻛﻪ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ‪ A‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻮﺩﺓ ﮔﺎﺯ ‪ yA‬ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﻭ‬

‫ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺳﻴﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻛﺎﺗﺎﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪ d‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ‪:‬‬
‫‪2 D AB Pt‬‬ ‫‪æ 2‬‬ ‫‪ö‬‬ ‫‪3 D AB Pt‬‬ ‫‪æ 3‬‬ ‫‪ö‬‬
‫‪NA = -‬‬ ‫÷ ‪Ln ç1 - y A‬‬ ‫‪(۲‬‬ ‫‪NA = -‬‬ ‫÷ ‪Ln ç1 - y A‬‬ ‫‪(۱‬‬
‫‪3 RTd‬‬ ‫‪è 3‬‬ ‫‪ø‬‬ ‫‪2 RTd‬‬ ‫‪è 2‬‬ ‫‪ø‬‬
‫‪3 DAB Pt‬‬ ‫‪æ 2‬‬ ‫‪ö‬‬ ‫‪3 D AB Pt‬‬ ‫‪æ 2‬‬ ‫‪ö‬‬
‫‪NA‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫÷ ‪Ln ç1 - y A‬‬ ‫‪(۴‬‬ ‫‪NA = -‬‬ ‫÷ ‪Ln ç1 - y A‬‬ ‫‪(۳‬‬
‫‪2 RTd‬‬ ‫‪è 3‬‬ ‫‪ø‬‬ ‫‪2 RTd‬‬ ‫‪è 3‬‬ ‫‪ø‬‬
‫‪ 5‬ـ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﻣﻮﻟﻜﻮﻟﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﻔﺖ‪:‬‬

‫‪ (۱‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﮔﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ (۲‬ﺗﺼﻌﻴﺪ ﻧﻔﺘﺎﻟﻴﻦ )‪ (A‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎﹰ ﻛﻢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۳‬ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﺁﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎﹰ ﺑﺎﻻ )ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺟﻮﺵ( ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۴‬ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎﹰ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 6‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺎﻻﺕ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫‪ (۱‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﻫﻢ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ‪ E D = E H = En‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۳‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﺎﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻧﻤﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻴﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۴‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﺪﺕﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺿﺮﺍﺋﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻄﺎﻱ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 7‬ـ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﻤﻲ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪ (۱‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﻳﺐ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﻣﻮﻟﻜﻮﻟﻲ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۳‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۴‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺁﺭﺍﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ـ ﺳﻴﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ٦٨‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫‪ 8‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺮﺍﻳﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻣﻴﺎﻥ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﺷﻤﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ‪ Sc1 = 50000‬ﻭ ‪ Sc2 = 0.95‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﺍﻳﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ـ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ـ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (۱‬ﺟﺬﺏ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۴‬ﺧﺸﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (۳‬ﺟﺬﺏ ﮔﺎﺯ ‪ A‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻭﻳﺴﻜﻮﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 9‬ـ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺰﺀ ‪ A‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﺯ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺟﺰﺀ ) ‪ ( B‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲﻛـﻪ ‪F L = FG‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ‪ y AG = 0.8‬ﻭ ‪ x AL = 0.2‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻥﮔﺎﻩ ﻏﻠﻈﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﺀ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ) ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﻨـﻲ ﺗﻌـﺎﺩﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ y = x‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪y Ai = x Ai = 0.7‬‬ ‫‪(۴‬‬ ‫‪y Ai = x Ai = 0.6‬‬ ‫‪(۳‬‬ ‫‪y Ai = x Ai = 0.5‬‬ ‫‪(۲‬‬ ‫‪y Ai = x Ai = 0.4‬‬ ‫‪(۱‬‬
‫‪ 10‬ـ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬

‫ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻒ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭ ‪ b‬ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪(١‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻒ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺏ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻭﺍﻛﻨﺶ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪(٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻒ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭ ‪ a‬ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫‪(٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻒ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺏ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻭ ‪ b‬ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪(۴‬‬
‫‪ 11‬ـ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺮﺍﻳﻨﺪ ﮔﺎﺯ ـ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ y = 50x‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪:‬‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﻓﺎﺯ ﮔﺎﺯ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (۱‬ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۴‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ‪ 50‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (۳‬ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 12‬ـ ﻳﻚﺻﺪ ﻣﻮﻝ ﺑﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻮﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ‪ 12‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﻣﻮﻟﻲ ‪ H 2S‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺟﺬﺏ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﺴﻮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ‪ 90%‬ﺍﺯ ‪H 2S‬‬

‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺣﻼﻝ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﺍﺗﺎﻧﻮﻝ ﺁﻣﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺣﻼﻝ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﺑـﺮ ﻣﻘـﺪﺍﺭ ﺣـﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺪﺕ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺣﻼﻝ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻮﻝ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ) ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ Y = 3X‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫‪3.6 (۴‬‬ ‫‪1.8 (۳‬‬ ‫‪5.4 (۲‬‬ ‫‪2.7 (۱‬‬
‫‪ 13‬ـ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﺘﻮﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﺩﺍﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺮﺍﻳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺧﻸ ﺑﺮﺝ ﭘﺮﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪(۱‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﺎﻻﺕ ﺧﻮﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺝ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪(۲‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻦ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﺩﺍﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻲﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺝ ﭘﺮﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪(۳‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪(۴‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺳﻮﺍﻻﺕ ‪٦٩‬‬

‫‪ 14‬ـ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﮔﻲ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﭘﺮﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﺍﺯﺩﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﺑﻲ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ‬ ‫‪ (۱‬ﺍﺯﺩﻳﺎﺩ ﺩﺑﻲ ﮔﺎﺯ‬
‫‪ (۴‬ﻫﻴﭽﻜﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪ (۳‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺑﺎﺯ ﭘﺮﻛﻦﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ 15‬ـ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺯﺩﻳﺎﺩ ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺮﺍﻳﻨﺪ ﮔﺎﺯ ـ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺣﺒﺎﺏﻫﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪..‬‬ ‫‪ (۱‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ (۴‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ ‪۲‬‬ ‫‪ (۳‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﺩﺭﺷﺖﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 16‬ـ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﺩﺍﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ‪ 40‬ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻣﺎﻥ ‪ 50‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺝ ﭘﺮﺷﺪﻩ ﺑـﺎ ‪ HETP = 0.4 m‬ﺟـﺎﻳﮕﺰﻳﻦ ﺷـﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻓـﺖ‬
‫‪pa‬‬
‫‪ 400‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺝ ﭼﻨﺪ ‪ kpa‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻓﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺍﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫‪ 12.8 (۴‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﭘﺎﺳﻜﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ 6.4 (۳‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﭘﺎﺳﻜﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ 4.6 (۲‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﭘﺎﺳﻜﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ 3.2 (۱‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﭘﺎﺳﻜﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ 17‬ـ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ‪ 96‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﻣﻮﻟﻲ ﺍﺗﺎﻧﻮﻝ ﻭ ‪ 4‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺁﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺝ ﭼﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ؟‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﻭ ﻣﺨﻠﻮﻁ ‪ 90‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻭ ‪ 10‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺁﺏ‬ ‫‪ (۱‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﻭ ﺁﺏ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ‬
‫‪ (۴‬ﺁﺏ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﻭ ﻣﺨﻠﻮﻁ ‪ 90‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻭ ‪ 10‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺁﺏ‬ ‫‪ (۳‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﻭ ﻣﺨﻠﻮﻁ ‪ 96‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ﻭ ‪ 4‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺁﺏ‬
‫‪ 18‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ‪ Flash‬ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺷﺒﻨﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻗﻴﻖﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪(۱‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻏﻨﻲﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪(۲‬‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺟﻮﺵ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﻭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺷﺒﻨﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪(۳‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪(۴‬‬
‫‪ 19‬ـ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ‪ 40‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻓﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺻـﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﻣﻌـﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺧﻄـﻮﻁ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺑـﺮﺝ ﺑـﻪ ﺻـﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫‪ y = 0.6 x + 0.32‬ﻭ ‪ y = 2x - 0.1‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ‪ 50‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﻭ ‪ 50‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪(۱‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪(۲‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪(۳‬‬
‫ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪(۴‬‬
‫‪ 20‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦﺗﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ (۴‬ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺳﻮﭘﺮﻫﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪ (۳‬ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪ (۲‬ﺩﻭﻓﺎﺯﻱ‬ ‫‪ (۱‬ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ‬
‫‪ 21‬ـ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺪﺍﻡﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺷﺒﻨﻢ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (۱‬ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۴‬ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺳﺮﺩﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺟﻮﺵ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ (۳‬ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺟﻮﺵ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ٧٠‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫‪ 22‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺮﻣﻮﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺝ ﭼﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ؟‬
‫‪ (۴‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬ ‫‪ (۳‬ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬ ‫‪ (۲‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‬ ‫‪ (۱‬ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻲﻣﺎﻧﺪ‬
‫‪ 23‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ H - xy‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺩﺑـﻲ ﻣـﺎﻳﻊ ﺑـﻪ ﺑﺨـﺎﺭ ﺑـﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎﻱ ‪ 3‬ﻭ ‪ 4‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ‪:‬‬

‫‪L2 G 3 = 2.5‬‬ ‫‪1.33 (۱‬‬

‫‪G 3 DD = 3‬‬ ‫‪0.60 (۲‬‬
‫‪L3 G 4 = 4‬‬ ‫‪1.5 (۳‬‬
‫‪G 4 DD = 6‬‬ ‫‪0.55 (۴‬‬

‫‪ 24‬ـ ﺍﺯﺩﻳﺎﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ (۴‬ﻋﺪﺓ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪ (۲‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻨﺪﺍﻧﺴﻮﺭ ‪ (۳‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺗﻲ ﺭﻳﺒﻮﻳﻠﺮ‬ ‫‪ (۱‬ﻗﻄﺮ ﺑﺮﺝ‬
‫‪ 25‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ‪ open steam‬ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲﻛﻪ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺳﻮﭘﺮﻫﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ (۱‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷﺒﻨﻢ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﺩﺑﻲ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺑﻲ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۳‬ﺍﻓﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺝ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۴‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ ‪۲‬‬
‫‪ 26‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺑﺮﺝ )‪ (D‬ﻭ ﺷـﺪﺕ ﺟﺮﻳـﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺼـﻮﻝ ﺟـﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺑـﺎ ﻫـﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﺑـﺮ ﻫﺴـﺘﻨﺪ ) ‪. ( S = D‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺮﻱ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ‪ 95‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻓﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ‪ 65‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺟﺰﺀ ﻓﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﻼﻗـﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ S‬ﻭ ‪ F‬ﺑﺎ ﺧﻂ ‪ y = x‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ‪:‬‬
‫‪0.8 (۴‬‬ ‫‪0.75 (۳‬‬ ‫‪0.70 (۲‬‬ ‫‪0.65 (۱‬‬

‫‪ 27‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﺍﻳﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻧﺎﻫﻤﺴﻮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫‪ (۱‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ‪ DR min‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻲ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﺐ ‪Tie - Line‬ﻫﺎ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ‪ DR‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﺐ ‪ Tie – Line‬ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۳‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ‪ DR min‬ﺣﺘﻤﺎﹰ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻴﺐ ‪ Tie – Line‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۴‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ ‪ ۳‬ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺳﻮﺍﻻﺕ ‪٧١‬‬

‫‪ 28‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﺍﻳﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ـ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺪﺍﻡﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫‪ (۴‬ﺑﺮﺝ ﭘﺮﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪ (۳‬ﺑﺮﺝ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﺩﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ (۲‬ﺑﺮﺝ ﭘﺎﺷﺸﻲ‬ ‫‪ (۱‬ﺑﺮﺝ ‪RDC‬‬

‫‪ 29‬ـ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻛﻲ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ‪ 50‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺟﺰﺀ ‪ C‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺣﻼﻝ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺣـﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺣﻼﻝ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ‪:‬‬

‫‪FD = 2‬‬ ‫‪5 (۱‬‬

‫‪DK = 8‬‬ ‫‪10 (۲‬‬

‫‪KS = 2‬‬ ‫‪15 (۳‬‬

‫‪25 (۴‬‬

‫‪ 30‬ـ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺮﺍﻳﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬

‫‪ A (۱‬ﻭ ‪ C‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺎﺏ ‪ B‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻢ ﺣﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ B (۲‬ﻭ ‪ C‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺎﺏ ‪ A‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻢ ﺣﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ A (۳‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺎﺏ ‪ C‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻢ ﺣﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۴‬ﻫﻴﭽﻜﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ 31‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺝﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﺩﺍﺭ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺎﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ HETP‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ (۱‬ﺑﺮﺝ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﺩﺍﺭ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺩﻳﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ‪ HETP‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺝ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ HETP (۳‬ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﻔﺮﺍﻧﺴﻴﻠﻲ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﺝ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۴‬ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﺍﻳﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﻨﻲﻫﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ٧٢‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫‪ 32‬ـ ﭘﺮﻭﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﻣﺎ ﻭ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬

‫‪ (۱‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖﮔﻴﺮ‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﻛﻮﻟﺮ ﺁﺑﻲ‬
‫‪ (۳‬ﺑﺮﺝ ﺧﻨﻚﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ )ﺑﺨﺶ ﻓﻮﻗﺎﻧﻲ(‬
‫‪ (۴‬ﺑﺮﺝ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻦ )ﺑﺨﺶ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﻧﻲ(‬

‫‪ 33‬ـ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺧﻨﻚﺷﺪﻥ ﺁﺏ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻛﻦ‪:‬‬

‫‪ (۲‬ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﺁﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﺁﺏ‬ ‫‪ (۱‬ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﺁﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ﻫﻮﺍ‬
‫‪ (۴‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ ‪۳‬‬ ‫‪ (۳‬ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺁﺏ ﻭ ﻫﻮﺍ‬
‫‪ 34‬ـ ﺑﺎ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﻟﻮﻟﻪ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﻍ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻣﻲﻣﺎﻧﺪ؟‬
‫‪ (۴‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻖ ﻫﻮﺍ‬ ‫‪ (۳‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ‬ ‫‪ (۲‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﺧﺸﻚ‬ ‫‪ (۱‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻧﺴﺒﻲ ﻫﻮﺍ‬
‫‪ 35‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﺍﻳﻨﺪ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪) Falling Rate‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ( ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪ (۴‬ﻫﻴﭽﻜﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪ (۳‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪ (۲‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪ (۱‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ‬
‫‪ 36‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﺍﻳﻨﺪ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪ constant Rate‬ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ (۱‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﺴﻢ )ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ( ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ unbound‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۳‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۴‬ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺟﻢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 37‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪﻱ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪﻱ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫‪ (۱‬ﺟﺎﻣﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﻏﻴﺮﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺁﺏ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﺟﺎﻣﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺁﺏ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺩﻣﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۳‬ﺁﺏ ﺗﺒﻠﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪﻱ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۴‬ﻫﺮﺳﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ 38‬ـ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪) capillary‬ﻣﻮﻳﻴﻨﮕﻲ( ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻧﻤﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ؟‬
‫‪ (۱‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺭﻳﺖ ﻧﺰﻭﻟﻲ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻣﻲﺍﻓﺘﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎﹰ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﺨﻠﺨﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۳‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۴‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺧﺸﻚ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﻮﺍﻱ ﻋﺒﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺳﻮﺍﻻﺕ ‪٧٣‬‬

‫‪ 39‬ـ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﻜﻲ ﺷـﺪﻥ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷـﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ ﺑﻬﺘـﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۳‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ (۴‬ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪ (۲‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ‬ ‫‪ (۱‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺑﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ‬
‫‪ 40‬ـ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﺟﺬﺏ )‪ (Break through‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﭘﺮﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﺫﺏ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻮﺍﻣـﻞ ﺯﻳـﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ؟‬
‫‪ (۴‬ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ‬ ‫‪ (۳‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪ (۲‬ﺩﺑﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ‬ ‫‪ (۱‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﺎﺫﺏ‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ٧٤‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫‪ ۱۳‬ـ ‪ ۲‬ـ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻻﺕ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ‬

‫‪ 1‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۲‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪G A = N A .A mass‬‬ ‫ﻧﺮﺥ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ‪:‬‬
‫‪A mass = ALa‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ‪:‬‬

‫‪NA = KC ê‬‬
‫‪A‬‬‫(‬
‫‪é C* - 0 + C* - C‬‬
‫‪A‬‬ ‫( )‬ ‫‪ù‬‬
‫‪Aout ú‬‬ ‫)‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ‪:‬‬
‫‪ëê‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪úû‬‬
‫) ‪G A = ( V0 A )( CAout - 0‬‬ ‫ﻧﺮﺥ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﻡﻫﺎﻱ ) ‪ ( C*A - 0‬ﻭ ) ‪ ( C*A - CAout‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﺮﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﺯ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ‪ A‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪é 2C* - CAout ù‬‬
‫‪V0 A CAout = K C ê A‬‬ ‫‪ú ALa‬‬
‫‪ë‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪û‬‬
‫‪2C*A‬‬ ‫*‪2P‬‬
‫= ‪CAout‬‬ ‫=‬
‫‪é‬‬ ‫‪2V0 ù‬‬ ‫‪é‬‬ ‫‪2V0 ù‬‬
‫‪ê1 + aLK ú RT ê1 + aLK ú‬‬
‫‪ë‬‬ ‫‪Cû‬‬ ‫‪ë‬‬ ‫‪Cû‬‬

‫‪ 2‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۱‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪dcA CA‬‬
‫‪N A = -D AB‬‬
‫‪dr‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪å Ni‬‬
‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺗﺼﻌﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﺋﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻮﺍ ﻧﺎﭼﻴﺰ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪CA‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺻﺮﻑﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪å Ni‬‬ ‫ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺮﻡ‬
‫‪dcA‬‬
‫‪N A = -D AB‬‬
‫‪dr‬‬
‫) ‪ A = N A .M A ( 2prL‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫‪CA‬‬

‫= ‪A‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫‪2pLD AB M A‬‬
‫‪ò‬‬ ‫*‪C‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪d CA‬‬

‫‪r‬‬

‫‪ò‬‬
‫‪dr‬‬
‫‪R r‬‬

‫= ‪A‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫(‬
‫‪2pLD AB M A CA* - CA‬‬ ‫)‬
‫‪æ r ö‬‬
‫÷ ‪Ln ç‬‬
‫‪èRø‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺳﻮﺍﻻﺕ ‪٧٥‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۲‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪D AB2‬‬ ‫‪T2 m1‬‬
‫=‬ ‫‪.‬‬
‫‪DAB1‬‬ ‫‪T1 m 2‬‬

‫‪330‬‬ ‫‪m1‬‬ ‫‪m2‬‬

‫´ ‪D AB2 = 2 ´ 10-9‬‬ ‫´‬ ‫‪= 4 ´ 10-9‬‬
‫‪300 0.55m1‬‬ ‫‪S‬‬

‫‪ 4‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۳‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪NA NC‬‬
‫=‬ ‫‪( NB = 0‬‬ ‫) ‪ = B‬ﺟﺰﺀ ﺟﺎﻣﺪ ‪,‬‬
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪-1‬‬
‫‪NA‬‬ ‫‪NA‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬
‫=‬ ‫=‬
‫‪å Ni‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬
‫‪NA - NA 2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ )‪ (22‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ )‪ ۲‬ـ ‪ (۴‬ﺩﺍﺭﻳﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪é 3‬‬ ‫‪ù‬‬
‫‪3 DAB P t‬‬ ‫‪ê 2 -0 ú‬‬
‫‪NA‬‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪Ln ê‬‬ ‫‪ú‬‬
‫‪2 RTd‬‬ ‫‪ê 3 - yA ú‬‬
‫‪ëê 2‬‬ ‫‪ûú‬‬
‫‪3 D AB P t‬‬ ‫‪æ 2‬‬ ‫‪ö‬‬
‫‪NA = -‬‬ ‫÷ ‪Ln ç 1 - y A‬‬
‫‪2 RTd‬‬ ‫‪è 3‬‬ ‫‪ø‬‬

‫‪ 5‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۳‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺁﺏ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﻼﻗﻲ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲﻫﺎﻱ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 6‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۴‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 7‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۳‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 8‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۳‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ Sc = 50000‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻭﻳﺴﻜﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ‪ Sc = 0.95‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﺯ ﮔﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 9‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۳‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪NA‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫‪=1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ )‪ (65‬ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ‬
‫‪å Ni‬‬
‫‪é 1 - y Ai ù é 1 - 0.2 ù‬‬
‫‪êë 1 - 0.8 úû = ê 1 - x ú‬‬
‫‪ë‬‬ ‫‪Ai û‬‬

‫‪(1 - yAi )(1 - x Ai ) = 0.16‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ٧٦‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ y = x‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻟﺬﺍ‪:‬‬

‫‪(1 - yAi )2 = 0.16‬‬
‫‪y Ai = x Ai = 0.6‬‬

‫‪ 10‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۴‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 11‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۱‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪kx‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻴﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪) m .‬ﺷﻴﺐ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ( ﺑﺰﺭﮒ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ‬
‫‪ky‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻓﺎﺯ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 12‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۲‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ‪ %90‬ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪Y2 = (1 - 0.9 ) Y1 = 0.1Y1‬‬
‫‪Rs ö‬‬ ‫‪Y2 - Y1‬‬
‫÷‬ ‫=‬
‫‪Es ømin X 2 - X1eq‬‬

‫‪ X1eq‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﺎ ‪ Y1‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻟﺬﺍ‪:‬‬

‫‪Rs ö‬‬ ‫‪0.1Y1 - Y1‬‬
‫÷‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= 2.7‬‬
‫‪Es ømin‬‬ ‫‪Y1‬‬
‫‪0-‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪Rs ö‬‬
‫÷‬ ‫‪= 2 ´ 2.7 = 5.4‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ‪Es ø‬‬

‫‪ 13‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۴‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 14‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۳‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 15‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۴‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 16‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۱‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ N = 40 ´ 0.5 = 20‬ﺗﺌﻮﺭﻱ‬
‫‪Z = 20 ´ 0.4 = 8 m‬‬
‫‪Dp = 8 ´ 400 = 3200 pa = 3.2 kpa‬‬

‫‪ 17‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۲‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ )‪۷‬ـ ‪(۱‬‬
‫‪ 18‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۴‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺳﻮﺍﻻﺕ ‪٧٧‬‬

‫‪ 19‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۱‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﻼﻗﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪0.6x + 0.32 = 2x - 0.1 ® x = 0.3 , y = 0.5‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﻫﻢ ﺻﺪﻕ ﻛﻨﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪q‬‬
‫= ‪0.5‬‬ ‫‪( 0.3) - 0.4‬‬
‫‪q -1‬‬ ‫‪q -1‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ‪ +50%‬ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ‪q = 0.5 ® 50%‬‬

‫‪ 20‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۴‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬
‫‪ (۵‬ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺳﻮﭘﺮﻫﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪ (۴‬ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪ (۳‬ﺩﻭﻓﺎﺯﻱ‬ ‫‪ (۲‬ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ‬ ‫‪ (۱‬ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺳﺮﺩ‬

‫‪ 21‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۴‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫( ‪R min‬‬ ‫( ‪) < R min‬‬ ‫( ‪) < R min‬‬ ‫( ‪) < R min‬‬ ‫( ‪) < R min‬‬ ‫)‬

‫‪ 22‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۱‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺍﺛﺮﻱ ﺑﺮ ‪ N min‬ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 23‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۲‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﻴﻨﻲ ‪ 3‬ﻭ ‪ 4‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ‪ L3‬ﻭ ‪ G 4‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻫﺮﻡ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪L3 G 4 DD‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬
‫=‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= 0.6‬‬
‫‪G 4 L3 DD 4 + 6‬‬

‫‪ 24‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۴‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪R - Þ N ¯ , DT - , Qc - , Q B -‬‬

‫‪ 25‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۴‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 26‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۴‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﺗﻼﻗﻲ ﺧﻂ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺧﻂ ‪ y = x‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺗﻔﺎﺿﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Dx D + Sx S D ´ 0.95 + D ´ 0.65‬‬
‫= ‪ x = x DM‬ﺗﻼﻗﻲ‬ ‫=‬ ‫‪= 0.8‬‬
‫‪D+S‬‬ ‫‪D+D‬‬

‫‪ 27‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۳‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ‪ DR min‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﺐ ‪ Tie Line‬ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ‪ DR‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻴﺐ ‪ Tie Line‬ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 28‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۱‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ٧٨‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫‪ 29‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۴‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪FK 10‬‬
‫‪F.‬‬
‫‪S max‬‬ ‫‪SK‬‬
‫=‬ ‫‪= 2 = 25‬‬
‫‪S min F. FD‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬
‫‪SD 10‬‬

‫‪ 30‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۴‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 31‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۴‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 32‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۴‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 33‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۲‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 34‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۴‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 35‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۳‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻫﻮﺍ ﺍﺛﺮﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺧﺸﻚﺷﺪﻥ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 36‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۳‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪ constant Rate‬ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺣﺒﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺪﺍﻳﺖ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﺻﺮﻑﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺧﺸﻚﻛﻦ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ Direct‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﺸﻚﻛﻦ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ Indirect‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺟﻮﺵ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 37‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۴‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 38‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۴‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺰﻡ ﺧﺸﻚﺷﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻣﻮﻳﻴﻨﮕﻲ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪ constant Rate‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 39‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۱‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺑﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻧﮕﻪﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﻗﻴﻖﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻠﻮﺭ ﻛﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺮﮊﻱ ‪ Steam‬ﺻﺮﻑ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﻐﻠﻴﻆ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﺯﺩﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﺒﻠﻮﺭ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﺯﺩﻳﺎﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﺟﻮﺵ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻛﻢ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻠﻴﻆ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻠﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻩﺣﻞ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺑﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺩﺑﻲ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 40‬ـ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ ۳‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺫﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﺎﺫﺏ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺟﺬﺏ ﺟﺎﺫﺏ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﺑﻲ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﻭ ﻏﻠﻈﺖ ﺟﺬﺏﺷﻮﻧﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺭﺍﻙ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ ﺩﻳﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﺮ ﺯﻭﺩﺗﺮ ﺍﺷﺒﺎﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺳﻮﺍﻻﺕ ‪٧٩‬‬

‫‪ ۱۴‬ـ ‪ ۱‬ـ ﺑﻮﺩﺟﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻻﺕ ﻛﻨﻜﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺧﻴﺮ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﺟﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻻﺕ ﻛﻨﻜﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺩﺭ ‪ ۶‬ﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪ ۶‬ﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻝ ‪۸۸‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻝ ‪۸۷‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻝ ‪۸۶‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻝ ‪۸۵‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻝ ‪۸۴‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻝ ‪۸۳‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺧﻴﺮ )‪(%‬‬
‫‪2.2‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪3.3‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺎﺭ‬
‫‪9.5‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪3.3‬‬ ‫‪6.7‬‬ ‫‪16.7‬‬ ‫ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﻣﻮﻟﻜﻮﻟﻲ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ‬
‫‪37.5‬‬ ‫‪7.8‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6.7‬‬ ‫‪16.7‬‬ ‫‪6.7‬‬ ‫‪6.7‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪8.3‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪13.3‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪6.7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎ‬
‫‪9.7‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪13.3‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪13.3‬‬ ‫‪6.7‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﺯ ـ ﻣﺎﻳﻊ‬
‫‪0.6‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪3.3‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﺟﺬﺏ ﻭ ﺩﻓﻊ ﮔﺎﺯﻱ‬

‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪1‬‬

‫‪37.3‬‬ ‫‪26.1‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪36.6‬‬ ‫‪16.7‬‬ ‫‪33.3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ‬

‫‪10.6‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪13.3‬‬ ‫‪3.3‬‬ ‫‪13.3‬‬ ‫‪3.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ‬

‫‪6.1‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪3.3‬‬ ‫‪6.7‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪6.7‬‬ ‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺳﻨﺠﻲ‬

‫‪11.1‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪13.3‬‬ ‫‪6.7‬‬ ‫‪16.7‬‬ ‫ﺧﺸﻚﻛﻦﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺨﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪2‬‬

‫‪4.7‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6.7‬‬ ‫‪6.7‬‬ ‫‪6.7‬‬ ‫‪3.3‬‬

‫‪25.2‬‬ ‫‪3.3‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪3.3‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪6.7‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﺟﺬﺏ ﺳﻄﺤﻲ‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻣﺪﺍﺕ‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﻛﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻟﻴﺰﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ‬
‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
 ‫‪ ٨٠‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﻔﺖ‪:‬‬

‫‪۱‬ـ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ‪ % 37.5‬ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻻﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺟﺮﻡ‪ % 37.3 ،‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪ I‬ﻭ ‪ % 25.2‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻻﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ‪ II‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬ـ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺧﺸﻚﻛﻦ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻳﻮﻧﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬ـ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺒﺎﺣﺚ ‪) Leaching‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻣﺪﺍﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﻠﻮﺭ )‪ (Crystallization‬ﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ )‪ (Filteration‬ﺳﺌﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ‪ ۶‬ﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺧﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﭼﻨﺪﺍﻧﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻧﻤﺮﻩ ﺩﺍﻭﻃﻠﺐ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪:‬‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬
‫…………………………………………………………………………………………………………‬